FORMULATION AND EVALUATION OF CERTAIN TOPICALLY ...
FORMULATION AND EVALUATION OF CERTAIN TOPICALLY ...
FORMULATION AND EVALUATION OF CERTAIN TOPICALLY ...
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>FORMULATION</strong> <strong>AND</strong> <strong>EVALUATION</strong> <strong>OF</strong><br />
<strong>CERTAIN</strong> <strong>TOPICALLY</strong> APPLIED DRUGS<br />
A Thesis Submitted for the<br />
Degree of Master<br />
In<br />
Pharmaceutical Sciences (Pharmaceutics)<br />
By<br />
Rasha Ali AL-Hussiny<br />
Under the Supervision of<br />
Prof. Dr. Fakhr El-Din S. Ghazy<br />
Professor of Pharmaceutics<br />
Faulty of Pharmacy<br />
Zagazig University<br />
Dr. Mohamed A. Hammad Dr. Nagia A. El-Megrab<br />
Assistant Professor of Assistant Professor of<br />
Pharmaceutics Pharmaceutics<br />
Faulty of Pharmacy Faulty of Pharmacy<br />
Zagazig University Zagazig University<br />
Department of Pharmaceutics<br />
And Industrial Pharmacy<br />
Faculty of Pharmacy<br />
Zagazig University<br />
2010<br />
- 1 -
- 2 -
- 3 -
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />
I am deeply thankful to GOD, by the grace of whom the progress and<br />
success of this work was possible.<br />
I would like to express my heartfelt gratitude and profound indebtedness<br />
to my guide Prof. Dr. F. S. Ghazy, Professor of Pharmaceutices, Faculty<br />
of Pharmacy, Zagazig University; the greatest supporting person for this<br />
work. Under his guidance I have worked. His constant enlightening<br />
support, timely advice all throughout my work and encouragement have<br />
been instrumental in the completion of this study.<br />
Also, I have to thank Dr. M.A. Hammad, Assistant Professor of<br />
Pharmaceutices, Faculty of Pharmacy, Zagazig University; for<br />
supervising the work, for his encouragement and for his great efforts to<br />
make this work possible.<br />
Also, I thank Dr. N. A. EL-Megrab, Assistant Professor of<br />
Pharmaceutices, Faculty of Pharmacy, Zagazig University; appreciating<br />
her continous encouragement and help supporting me with much scientific<br />
materials and with valuable instructions.<br />
I also extend my sincere thanks to all my colleagues and members of the<br />
department of Pharmaceutics, Faculty of Pharmacy, Zagazig University<br />
for their help.<br />
And finally I would like to thank my family, for their support during this<br />
study …Thank You.<br />
Rasha<br />
2010<br />
- 4 -
ABBREVIATIONS<br />
ABBREVIATION THE WORD<br />
Glz Gliclazide<br />
Glib Glibenclamide<br />
PEG Polyethylene glycol<br />
UR Urea<br />
glu Glucose<br />
O/W Oil in water<br />
W/O Water in oil<br />
HPMC Hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose<br />
WSB Water soluble base<br />
IPP Isopropyl palmitate<br />
IPM Isopropyl myristate<br />
OA Oleic acid<br />
LOA Linoleic acid<br />
Lab Labrafil<br />
Tc Transcutol<br />
SLS Sodium lauryl sulphate<br />
Tw 80 Tween 80 ( Polyoxyethylene Sorbitan<br />
Monooleate)<br />
PG Propylene glycol<br />
Span 80 Sorbitan mono-oleate<br />
i.p intraperitoneal<br />
NIDDM Non insulin dependant diabetes mellitus<br />
- 5 -
List of Tables<br />
List of Figures<br />
Contents<br />
Abstract ………………………………………………………………. i<br />
General Introduction …………………………………………………. 1<br />
Scope of work ………………………………………………………... 35<br />
Part One<br />
Formulation and Evaluation of Topically Applied Gliclazide<br />
- Introduction ………………………………………………………… 37<br />
Chapter (I)<br />
Formulation and Characterization of Gliclazide Solid Dispersions<br />
-Introduction …………………………………………………………. 40<br />
-Experimental and methodology …………………………………….. 67<br />
-Results and discussion ……………………………………………… 74<br />
-Conclusion ………………………………………………………….. 117<br />
Chapter (II)<br />
In Vitro and In Vivo Studies on Topical Applications of Gliclazide<br />
Solid Dispersions<br />
-Introduction ………………………………………………………. 118<br />
-Experimental and methodology ………………………………….. 119<br />
-Results and discussion …………………………………………… 134<br />
-Conclusion ……………………………………………………….. 157<br />
- 6 -
Part Two<br />
Formulation and Evaluation of Topically Applied Glibenclamide<br />
-Introduction …………………………………………………… 158<br />
-Experimental and methodology ………………………………… 176<br />
-Results and discussion …………………………………………… 186<br />
-Conclusion ……………………………………………………….. 235<br />
General Conclusion …………………………………………………. 237<br />
References …………………………………………………………… 238<br />
Arabic Summary …………………………………………………….. <br />
- 7 -
Figure<br />
List of Figures<br />
Number Description<br />
- 8 -<br />
Page<br />
Number<br />
1 Diagrammatic representation of the skin structure. 3<br />
2 Diagrammatic representation of the stratum<br />
corneum and the intercellular and transcellular<br />
routes of penetration<br />
3 Schematic representation of types of external<br />
medicines.<br />
4 Structure of gliclazide<br />
5 Diagrammatic representation of process of<br />
solubilization<br />
6 Phase diagram for eutectic system 55<br />
7 Phase diagram for Discontinuous solid solutions 56<br />
8 Substitutional crystalline solid solutions<br />
9 Interstitial crystalline solid solutions.<br />
10 Amorphous crystalline solid solution 58<br />
11 UV spectra of gliclazide in methanol. 74<br />
12 Calibration curve of gliclazide in methanol at max<br />
227 nm.<br />
13 Calibration curve of gliclazide in phosphate buffer<br />
(7.4)at max 227 nm .<br />
14 Phase solubility diagram of gliclazide in water at<br />
25°C in presence of PEG 4000 and PEG 6000.<br />
15 Phase solubility diagram of gliclazide in water<br />
at 25°C in presence of glucose and urea.<br />
16 Dissolution profile of gliclazide-PEG 6000 systems. 82<br />
17 Dissolution profile of gliclazide-PEG 4000 systems. 84<br />
10<br />
20<br />
37<br />
41<br />
57<br />
58<br />
75<br />
75<br />
78<br />
78
18 Dissolution profile of gliclazide-glucose systems. 87<br />
19 Dissolution profile of gliclazide-urea systems 89<br />
20 Ratio between % of gliclazide dissolved from (A)<br />
drug in different solid dispersions and (B) drug<br />
alone at t = 60 min.<br />
21 FTIR spectra of gliclazide –PEG 6000 systems.<br />
22 FTIR spectra of gliclazide –PEG 4000 systems. 100<br />
23 FTIR spectra of gliclazide –glucose systems.<br />
- 9 -<br />
92<br />
99<br />
101<br />
24 FTIR spectra of gliclazide –urea systems. 102<br />
25 DSC spectra of gliclazide –PEG 6000 systems. 106<br />
26 DSC spectra of gliclazide –PEG 4000 systems. 107<br />
27 DSC spectra of gliclazide –glucose systems.<br />
108<br />
28 DSC spectra of gliclazide –urea systems. 109<br />
29 X-ray spectra of gliclazide –PEG 6000 systems. 113<br />
30 X-ray spectra of gliclazide –PEG 4000 systems. 114<br />
31 X-ray spectra of gliclazide –glucose systems. 115<br />
32 X-ray spectra of gliclazide –urea systems. 116<br />
33 Diagrammatic representation of the drug diffusion<br />
apparatus.<br />
34 In vitro release profile of gliclazide from different<br />
topical preparations.<br />
35 In vitro release profile of gliclazide and (8:92)<br />
gliclazide –PEG 6000 solid dispersion from<br />
different topical bases.<br />
36 In vitro release profile of gliclazide and (1:10)<br />
gliclazide –glucose solid dispersion from different<br />
topical bases.<br />
37 In vitro release profile of gliclazide and (8:92)<br />
gliclazide –PEG 4000 solid dispersion from<br />
different topical bases.<br />
125<br />
136<br />
141<br />
143<br />
145
38 In vitro release profile of gliclazide and (1:10)<br />
gliclazide –urea solid dispersion from different<br />
topical bases.<br />
39 Release of gliclazide from different bases with<br />
different solid dispersions.<br />
40 Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral<br />
and topical administration of gliclazide in normal<br />
rats.<br />
41 Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral<br />
and topical administration of gliclazide in diabetic<br />
rats.<br />
- 10 -<br />
147<br />
148<br />
153<br />
156<br />
42 Glibenclamide structure. 158<br />
43 Techniques to optimize drug permeation across the<br />
skin.<br />
44 UV absorption spectra for glibenclamide in<br />
methanol.<br />
45 Calibration curve of glibenclamide in phosphate<br />
buffer (7.4) at max 227 nm.<br />
46 Release profile of glibenclamide from different<br />
topical bases.<br />
47 Percentage drug released from different topical<br />
bases.<br />
48 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
cetrimide.<br />
49 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of SLS.<br />
163<br />
186<br />
188<br />
192<br />
194<br />
199<br />
201
50 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of Tween<br />
80.<br />
51 Release profile of glibenclamide from water<br />
soluble base containing different concentrations of<br />
labrafil.<br />
52 Percentage drug released from water soluble base<br />
containing different concentrations of different<br />
surfactants<br />
53 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of oleic<br />
acid.<br />
54 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of linoleic<br />
acid.<br />
55 Percentage drug released from water soluble base<br />
containing different concentrations of fatty acids.<br />
56 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
isopropyl myristate.<br />
57 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
isopropyl palmitate .<br />
58 Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
Transcutol.<br />
- 11 -<br />
203<br />
205<br />
206<br />
209<br />
211<br />
212<br />
215<br />
217<br />
220
59 . Percentage drug released from water soluble base<br />
containing different concentrations of fatty acid<br />
esters and Transcutol.<br />
60 Percentage drug released from water soluble base<br />
containing the best concentrations of different<br />
penetration enhancers used.<br />
61 Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral<br />
and topical administration of glibenclamide in<br />
normal rats.<br />
62 Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral<br />
and topical administration of glibenclamide in<br />
diabetic rats.<br />
- 12 -<br />
221<br />
222<br />
231<br />
234
Table<br />
Number<br />
List of Tables<br />
Description Page<br />
1 Methods for the characterization of solid<br />
dispersion.<br />
2 Types of carriers and their ratios in gliclazide solid<br />
dispersions and physical mixtures.<br />
3 Solubility enhancement data of gliclazide in various<br />
carrier solutions at 25°C.<br />
4 Effect of change in pH on the solubility of<br />
gliclazide.<br />
5 Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in<br />
distilled water from different gliclazide - PEG 6000<br />
systems.<br />
6 Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in<br />
distilled water from different gliclazide - PEG 4000<br />
systems.<br />
7 Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in<br />
distilled water from different gliclazide – glucose<br />
systems.<br />
8 Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in<br />
distilled water from different gliclazide –urea<br />
systems.<br />
9 Collective data for dissolution of gliclazide<br />
obtained from different carriers used.<br />
10 FTIR spectra of gliclazide solid dispersions and<br />
physical mixtures compared with individual<br />
components.<br />
- 13 -<br />
Number<br />
64<br />
69<br />
77<br />
79<br />
81<br />
83<br />
86<br />
88<br />
91<br />
95
11 Fusion temperatures (Tc) and heat of fusion (<br />
of gliclazide solid dispersions and physical mixtures<br />
compared with individual components.<br />
12 º)<br />
for some gliclazide solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures compared with individual components.<br />
- 14 -<br />
105<br />
111<br />
13 Composition of different topical bases 124<br />
14 Amounts of sample and standard used 131<br />
15 In vitro release data of gliclazide from<br />
different topical bases<br />
135<br />
16 Viscosity of different topical bases. 138<br />
17 In vitro release of gliclazide and (8:92) gliclazide-<br />
PEG 6000 solid dispersion from different topical<br />
bases<br />
18 In vitro release of gliclazide and (1:10) gliclazide-<br />
glucose solid dispersion from different topical<br />
bases.<br />
19 In vitro release of gliclazide and (8:92) gliclazide-<br />
PEG 4000 solid dispersion from different topical<br />
bases.<br />
20 In vitro release of gliclazide and (1:10) gliclazide-<br />
urea solid dispersion from different topical bases.<br />
21 Kinetic data of the release of gliclazide and its solid<br />
dispersions from different topical bases.<br />
22 Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and<br />
topical application of gliclazide and 10:90<br />
gliclazide- PEG 6000 solid dispersion in normal<br />
rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
140<br />
142<br />
144<br />
146<br />
149<br />
152
23 Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and<br />
topical application of gliclazide and 10:90<br />
gliclazide- PEG 6000 solid dispersion in diabetic<br />
rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
- 15 -<br />
155<br />
24 Composition of different topical formulations. 180<br />
25 Types of penetration enhancers and percentages<br />
used.<br />
26 In vitro release of glibenclamide from different<br />
topical bases.<br />
27 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
cetrimide<br />
28 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of Sodium<br />
lauryl sulphate (SLS).<br />
29 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of Tween<br />
80.<br />
30 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of labrafil.<br />
31 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of oleic<br />
acid.<br />
32 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of linoleic<br />
acid.<br />
33 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
Isopropylmyristate (IPM).<br />
182<br />
198<br />
200<br />
202<br />
204<br />
208<br />
210<br />
214
34 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
Isopropylpalmitate (IPP).<br />
35 In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble<br />
base containing different concentrations of<br />
Transcutol.<br />
36 Kinetic data of the release of Glib from different<br />
topical bases<br />
37 Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and<br />
topical application of glibenclamide and<br />
glibenclamide with 1% oleic acid in normal rats.<br />
38 Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and<br />
topical application of glibenclamide and<br />
glibenclamide with 1% cetrimide in normal rats<br />
39 Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and<br />
topical application of glibenclamide and<br />
glibenclamide with 1% isopropyl myristate (IPM) in<br />
normal rats..<br />
40 Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and<br />
topical application of glibenclamide and<br />
glibenclamide with 5 % Labrafil in normal rats.<br />
41 Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and<br />
topical application of glibenclamide and<br />
glibenclamide with 1% cetrimide in diabetic rats.<br />
- 16 -<br />
216<br />
219<br />
224<br />
227<br />
228<br />
229<br />
230<br />
233
- 17 -
Abstract<br />
Part One<br />
Formulation and Evaluation of Topically Applied Gliclazide.<br />
Chapter One<br />
Formulation and Characterization of Gliclazide Solid Dispersions.<br />
The purpose of this study was to improve the dissolution of Gliclazide<br />
(Glz) for enhancing its bioavailability and therapeutic efficacy.<br />
Physical mixtures (PMs) and solid dispersions (SDs) of Glz with each of<br />
polyethylene glycol 4000 (PEG 4000) and polyethylene glycol 6000 (PEG<br />
6000) in ratios 10: 90, 8: 92, 5: 95 and 1: 99 (drug-to-carrier w/w) were<br />
prepared. Glucose (glu) and urea (UR) in ratios 1:1, 1:2, 1: 3, 1: 5 and 1: 10<br />
(drug-to-carrier w/w) were also prepared. All SDs were prepared by solvent<br />
evaporation method. The equilibrium solubility of Glz in presence of<br />
different concentrations of the above mentioned carriers was determined at<br />
25°C and the influence of different pH on the solubility of Glz was also<br />
examined. The dissolution of all prepared samples (PMs and SDs) was<br />
carried out in media of pure distilled water pH 6.5. All SDs and PMs as well<br />
as individual components were subjected to inspection by FTIR<br />
spectroscopy, DSC and X-ray powder diffraction.<br />
The results revealed that, the aqueous solubility of Glz was favoured<br />
by the presence of PEG 4000 and PEG 6000 while the aqueous solubility<br />
was slightly improved when glu or UR was used as a carrier. The solubility<br />
of Glz increased with increasing pH (higher in alkaline medium rather than<br />
acidic one). The type of carrier and drug to carrier ratio had great influence<br />
on the rate and extent of dissolution of Glz from its SDs. All the investigated<br />
carriers improved the dissolution rate of Glz. The highest rates were obtained<br />
from PEG 6000 followed by PEG 4000, glu and finally UR SDs at mixing<br />
- 18 -
atios of (1:99), (1:99), (1:10) and (1:10) respectively. Physical<br />
characterization of all systems prepared revealed structural changes in the<br />
prepared SDs from the plain drug, which may account for increased<br />
dissolution rates.<br />
It was concluded that SDs showed increased dissolution rate as compared<br />
to the pure drug.<br />
Chapter Two<br />
In Vitro and In Vivo Studies on Topical Application of<br />
Gliclazide Solid Dispersions<br />
The aim of this study to enhance the release of Glz from topical<br />
preparations by incorporating it in the form of solid dispersion with water<br />
soluble carriers. Another aim was to determine whether a Glz would be<br />
absorbed through the skin and consequently lower blood glucose levels.<br />
Glz was formulated in different topical formulations. For this<br />
purpose, a set of traditional formulations such as ointment bases, cream<br />
bases and gel bases were utilized. The traditional classes of ointment<br />
bases studied were water soluble base (WSB), emulsion bases and<br />
absorption base. The gel base studied was hydroxylpropyl<br />
methylcellulose gel (HPMC gel). The emulsion bases chosen were oil in<br />
water (O/W) and water in oil (W/O) emulsions. Investigation of the<br />
release studies from topical formulation bases were carried in vitro over a<br />
period of six hours at a thermostatically controlled water bath operating at<br />
37°C and 100 rpm using the rate limiting membrane technique , at<br />
concentration of 1 % w/w Glz for all topical preparations. The receptor<br />
media employed throughout this investigation was sörensen’phosphate<br />
buffer of pH 7.4. The release studies of drug from (8:92) PEG 6000,<br />
- 19 -
(8:92) PEG 4000, (1:10) glu and (1:10) UR w/w drug to carrier ratio SDs<br />
from WSB, HPMC gel and O/W emulsion were investigated. In vitro skin<br />
permeation of Glz and its SDs from different topical formulations was<br />
studied. The blood glucose reducing hypoglycemic activity of Glz<br />
systems was studied in both normal and diabetic rats.<br />
The results revealed that, the percentage amount of drug released<br />
from WSB, gel base are greater than that released from other bases. The<br />
rate of drug release can be arranged in the following descending order:<br />
WSB (64.15 %) > HPMC gel (43.38 %) > O/W emulsion base (8.43 %).<br />
There is no drug is released fromabsorption base and W/O emulsion<br />
base. The amount of drug released from topical bases incorporating SDs<br />
can be arranged in the following descending order: Topical preparations<br />
containing drug: PEG 6000 (8:92) SD > (1:10) drug: glu (1/10) SD ><br />
drug: PEG 4000 (8:92) SD > drug: UR (1:10) SD > pure drug.Isolated<br />
skin permeation studies indicated that, the amount of Glz permeated<br />
across hairless rabbit skin was too small to be measured<br />
spectrophotometrically. The present study showed that Glz was absorbed<br />
through the skin and lowered the blood glucose levels. Topical<br />
preparations of Glz or its SDs exhibited better control of blood glucose<br />
level than oral Glz administration in rats as topical route effectively<br />
maintained normoglycemic level in contrast to the oral group which<br />
produced remarkable hypoglycemia. The blood glucose reducing activity<br />
of ointment contained (10:90) Glz –PEG 6000 solid dispersions was<br />
significantly more when compared to ointment contained Glz alone.<br />
The results suggest the possibility of transdermal administration of<br />
Glz for the treatment of NIDDM.<br />
- 20 -
- 21 -
General introduction<br />
Skin anatomy and physiology<br />
Skin is the largest organ of the body and, in addition to its primary<br />
function as a barrier for protection of the internal biological milieu from<br />
the external environment, has a variety of roles in the maintenance of<br />
physiological homeostasis (Monteiro-Riviere, 2001a) .<br />
1. The main funcnion of the skin:<br />
There are many different structures within the skin. Together these<br />
structures impart many protective properties to the skin that help to avoid<br />
damage to the body from outside influences. In this way, the skin serves<br />
many purposes:<br />
Protects the body from water loss and from injury due to bumps,<br />
chemicals, sunlight or microorganisms, and some glands (sebaceous)<br />
may have weak anti-infective properties.<br />
Helps to control body temperature through sweat glands.<br />
Is the sensor to inform the brain of changes in immediate environment.<br />
Produces vitamin D in the epidermal layer, when it is exposed to the<br />
sun's rays.<br />
Uses specialized pigment cells to protect us from penetration of<br />
ultraviolet rays of the sun.<br />
Act as channel for communication to the outside world.<br />
Plays an important role in regulation of body blood pressure (Chine,<br />
1982).<br />
- 22 -
2. Skin anatomy:<br />
As shown in (Figure 1), anatomically, skin is comprised of two principal<br />
components: a stratified, a vascular epidermis and the underlying dermis.<br />
The epidermis is further classified into layers called the stratum corneum,<br />
stratum lucidum, stratum granulosum, stratum spinosum, and the stratum<br />
basale. Together, these cell layers function to anchor the epidermis to the<br />
underlying dermis, to replenish cells that are naturally sloughed off from<br />
the surface epidermis, and to form a permeability barrier that protects the<br />
internal biological environment from the external milieu. The dermis<br />
consists of a dense irregular network of collagen, elastic, and reticular<br />
fibers that provides mechanical support for the tissue. An extensive<br />
network of capillaries, nerves, and lymphatics also located in the dermis<br />
facilitate the exchange of metabolites between blood and tissues, fat<br />
storage, protection against infections, and tissue repair. Below the dermis<br />
is the hypodermis, which anchors skin to underlying muscle or bone by<br />
loose connective tissue of collagen and elastic fibers (Monteiro-Riviere,<br />
2001a, 2004, 2006; Taylor et al., 2006).<br />
2.1. The epidermis:<br />
The epidermis is derived from ectoderm and consists of stratified<br />
squamous keratinized epithelium. The thickness and number of stratified<br />
layers varies among mammalian species and anatomical location. In<br />
general, porcine skin in the thoracolumbar area is an acceptable model for<br />
percutaneous absorption studies and has an epidermal thickness of about<br />
52 (Monteiro-<br />
Riviere, 2004). The vascular epidermis continuously undergoes an<br />
orderly process of proliferation, differentiation, and keratinization to<br />
- 23 -
eplenish the epidermis as stratum corneum cells are naturally sloughed<br />
from the skin’s surface (Monteiro-Riviere, 2006).<br />
Figure 1: Diagrammatic representation of the skin structure.<br />
- 24 -
Keratinocytes are the predominate cell type of the epidermis, accounting<br />
for approximately 80% of the cell population (Monteiro-Riviere, 2004).<br />
These cells originate in the stratum basale and, upon mitosis, undergo a<br />
continual differentiation process, known as keratinization. During this<br />
process, the epidermal cells migrate upward, increase in size, and produce<br />
differentiation products such as tonofilaments, keratohyalin granules, and<br />
lamellated bodies. Epidermal layers are easily identified by distinct<br />
differences in cell morphology and differentiation products that result due<br />
to keratinization. The remaining group of epidermal cells, known as<br />
nonkeratinocytes, consists of melanocytes, Langerhans cells, and Merkel<br />
cells and do not participate in the process of keratinization (Smack, et al.,<br />
1994).<br />
Stratum basale:<br />
The stratum basale is the layer of skin located closest to the dermis<br />
and is comprised of a single layer of columnar or cuboidal cells that are<br />
attached to the overlying stratum spinosum cells and to adjacent basale<br />
cells by desmosomes and to the underlying basement membrane by<br />
hemidesmosomes. Desmosomes are small, localized adhesion sites that<br />
mediate direct cell-to-cell contact by providing anchoring sites for<br />
intermediate filaments of the cellular cytoskeletons. Hemidesmosomes,<br />
on the other hand, function to provide strong attachment sites between the<br />
intermediate filaments of cells and the extracellular matrix of the<br />
underlying basal lamina (Taylor et al., 2006). In addition to their role in<br />
synthesizing the basement membrane, basale cells also function as stem<br />
cells to continuously produce keratinocytes that subsequently undergo<br />
keratinization. Immature keratinocytes of the stratum basale are capable<br />
of engaging in the synthesis of keratin, which are later assembled into<br />
keratin filaments called tonofilaments. Other nonkeratinocytes cells are<br />
also present in the stratum basale. Merkel cells are closely associated with<br />
- 25 -
nerve fibers and function as mechanoreceptors capable of relaying<br />
sensory information to the brain. Additionally, melanocytes, which<br />
produce and secrete melanin and provide protection from ultraviolet<br />
irradiation, reside near the basement membrane and are responsible for<br />
transferring melanin to surrounding keratinocytes.<br />
Stratum spinosum:<br />
The stratum spinosum or “prickle cell layer” is located above the<br />
stratum basale and consists of several layers of irregularly shaped<br />
polyhedral cells. Tight junctions and desmosomes connect adjacent cells<br />
and the underlying stratum basale. Additionally, Langerhans cells,<br />
important for the skin’s immune response, are found in this epidermal<br />
layer. This layer is morphologically distinguished from other epidermal<br />
layers by the presence of tonofilaments. As keratinocytes mature and<br />
move upward through this layer, the cells increase in size and become<br />
flattened in a plane parallel to the surface of the skin. Keratinocytes<br />
within the upper part of the stratum spinosum begin to produce<br />
keratohyalin granules and lamellar bodies, which are distinctive features<br />
of the cells in the stratum granulosum.<br />
Stratum granulosum:<br />
The next epidermal layer, the stratum granulosum, contains several<br />
layers of flattened cells positioned parallel to skin’s surface. The<br />
numerous granules those are present in the cells of this layer contain<br />
precursors for the protein filaggrin, which is responsible for the<br />
aggregation of keratin filaments present within the cornified cells of the<br />
stratum corneum. These granules fuse with the cell membrane and secrete<br />
their contents via exocytosis into the intercellular spaces between the<br />
stratum granulosum and stratum corneum layers. The lipid contents of the<br />
- 26 -
granules then form the intercellular lipid component of the stratum<br />
corneum barrier.<br />
Stratum lucidum:<br />
Present only in areas of thick skin, such as the palms of the hands<br />
and soles of the feet, is a subdivision of the stratum corneum called the<br />
stratum lucidum. This epidermal layer is a thin, translucent layer of cells<br />
devoid of nuclei and cytoplasmic organelles. These cells are keratinized<br />
and contain a viscous fluid, eleidin, which is analogous to keratin.<br />
tratum corneum:<br />
The stratum corneum is the outermost layer of the epidermis and its<br />
composition and organization significantly contribute to the skin’s<br />
permeability barrier. The stratum corneum consists of terminally<br />
differentiated cells arranged in multicellular stacks perpendicular to the<br />
surface of the skin. The cells are devoid of nuclei and cytoplasmic<br />
organelles and are almost completely filled with keratin filaments. The<br />
interlocking columns of cells are embedded in a structured lamellar<br />
matrix that consists of specialized lipids secreted from the granules of the<br />
stratum granulosum cells. This barrier functions to restrict the penetration<br />
of hydrophilic substances and large entities through the skin and to<br />
prevent excess loss of body fluids (Mackenzie, 1975; Menton, 1976;<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, 1991, 2001a, 2001b, 2006; Smack et al., 1994;<br />
Taylor et al., 2006)<br />
2.2. The dermis<br />
Collagen, elastic, and reticular fibers embedded in an amorphous<br />
ground substance of proteoglycans create a network of dense connective<br />
tissue that makes up the dermis. Fibroblasts, mast cells, and macrophages<br />
are the predominate cell types found in the dermis; however, plasma cells,<br />
- 27 -
fat cells, chromatophores, and extravasated leukocytes are often also<br />
present. The more superficial layer of the dermis, the papillary layer, lies<br />
immediately beneath the basement membrane and contains a less dense,<br />
irregular framework of type I and type III collagen molecules and elastic<br />
fibers. This region also contains blood and lymphatic vessels that serve<br />
but do not enter the epidermis and nerve processes that either terminate in<br />
the dermis or penetrate into the epidermis. Fingerlike protrusions of the<br />
dermal connective tissue into the underside of the epidermis are called<br />
dermal papillae. Likewise, epidermal ridges are similar protrusions of the<br />
epidermis into the dermis. Increased mechanical stress on the skin<br />
increases the depth of the epidermal ridges and length of the dermal<br />
papillae, thus, creating a more extensive interface between the dermis and<br />
epidermis. The reticular layer of the dermis lies beneath the papillary<br />
layer. This layer is substantially thicker than its superficial layer and is<br />
characterized by thick bundles of mostly type I collagen, coarser elastic<br />
fibers and fewer cells (Monteiro-Riviere, 1991, 2001a, 2001b, 2006).<br />
2.3. The hypodermis:<br />
The hypodermis is superficial fascia that lies below the skin and helps to<br />
anchor the dermis to underlying muscle and bone. It is comprised of<br />
connective tissue containing a loose arrangement of collagen and elastic<br />
fibers that allows for flexibility and free movement of the skin over the<br />
underlying structures (Monteiro-Riviere, 2006).<br />
2.4. Skin appendages:<br />
Hair follicles, associated sebaceous glands, arrector pili muscles,<br />
and sweat glands are appendageal structures commonly found in skin.<br />
Hairs are produced by hair follicles and are keratinized structures derived<br />
from epidermal invaginations that traverse the dermis and may extend<br />
- 28 -
into the hypodermis. Although skin penetration through a hair follicle still<br />
requires a compound to traverse the stratum corneum, follicles represent<br />
regions of greater surface areas and can, therefore, contribute to increased<br />
transdermal absorption (Monteiro-Riviere, 2004). Connective tissue at<br />
the base of the hair follicle provides an attachment site for the arrector pili<br />
muscle, which upon contraction not only erects the hair but also assists in<br />
emptying the sebaceous glands. Sebaceous glands release their secretory<br />
product, sebum, into ducts that empty into the canal of the hair follicle.<br />
Sebum is an oily secretion that acts as an antibacterial agent. Apocrine<br />
and eccrine sweat glands are also located in skin and function to produce<br />
secretions involved in communication and thermoregulation, respectively<br />
(Monteiro-Riviere and Stinsons, 1993).<br />
- 29 -
Percutaneous absorption<br />
The primary barrier against the passage of foreign hydrophilic<br />
substances into the skin is the stratum corneum. The stratum corneum<br />
consists of 10-15 layers of nonviable, protein rich cells surrounded by an<br />
extracellular lipid matrix. The intercellular lipid lamellae, composed<br />
mainly of ceramides, cholesterol, and fatty acids, are primarily<br />
responsible for restricting the passage of aqueous entities through the skin<br />
(Wertz, 2004). The importance of the lipid moieties in barrier function<br />
has been demonstrated by the removal of lipids from the stratum corneum,<br />
which subsequently results in an increased penetration of compounds<br />
(Hadgraft, 2001; Monteiro-Riviere et al., 2001). The stratum corneum<br />
serves as the rate-limiting barrier to percutaneous absorption because the<br />
underlying epidermal layers are much more aqueous in nature and, thus,<br />
allow the passage of substances to occur more easily. Once penetration<br />
through the epidermis occurs, there is little resistance to diffusion, and<br />
substances have access to systemic circulation via absorption into the<br />
blood and lymphatic vessels located in the dermis. Additionally,<br />
keratinocytes possess metabolizing enzymes that interact with the<br />
diffused compound and produce metabolites that can easily be absorbed<br />
by cutaneous vasculature (Monteiro-Riviere, 2001a; Riviere, 1990;<br />
Bronaugh et al., 1989).<br />
1. Pathways for transdermal drug delivery:<br />
Drugs can be diffused through the following pathways:<br />
1.1. Transappendagel:<br />
Diffusion occurs through hair follicle, sebaceous glands and<br />
eccrine glands<br />
- 30 -
1.2. Transepidermal:<br />
It is the most important pathway of drug permeation. As shown in<br />
(Figure 2) it is divided into:<br />
1.2.1. Intercellular bathway:<br />
It is the main route for permeation of the most drugs through<br />
intercellular spaces between the cells of stratum corneum, which is filled<br />
with a lipid, based lamellar crystalline structure (Moghimi et al., 1996,<br />
1997, and 1998).<br />
1.2.2. Transcellular pathway:<br />
Transport via corneocytes e.g. through protein-filled cell cytoplasm<br />
and protein-lipid cellular envelope (Moghimi et al., 1999).<br />
Figure 2: Diagrammatic representation of the stratum<br />
corneum and the intercellular and transcellular routes of penetration<br />
(Barry, 2001)<br />
- 31 -
2. Factors affecting percutaneous absorption:<br />
2.1. Physicochemical properties of the penterant molecules:<br />
2.1.1. Partition coefficient:<br />
The majority of topically applied drugs are covalent compounds in<br />
nature. Regardless of the types of vehicle used, at some point during the<br />
process of transdermal penetration the drug molecules have to dissolve<br />
and diffuse within the endogenous hydrated tissues of the stratum<br />
corneum. Drugs possessing both water and lipid solubility are favorably<br />
absorbed through the skin. Transdermal permeability coefficient a linear<br />
dependency on partition coefficient .A lipid/ water partition coefficient of<br />
one or greater is generally required for optimal tarnsdermal permeability.<br />
The drug substances should have a greater physicochemical attraction to<br />
the skin than to the vehicle in which it is presented (Chine, 1982).<br />
Molecules showing intermediate partition coefficients (log P<br />
octanol/water of 1-3) have adequate solubility within the lipid domains of<br />
the stratum corneum to permit diffusion through this domain whilst still<br />
having sufficient hydrophilic nature to allow partitioning into the viable<br />
tissues of the epidermis (Heather, 2005).<br />
2.1.2. pH conditions:<br />
The pH condition of the skin surface and in the drug delivery<br />
systems affect the extent of dissociation of ionogenic drug molecules and<br />
their transdermal permeability. The pH dependence of the transdermal<br />
permeability was related to the effect of the solution pH on the<br />
concentration of lipophilic, nonionized species of the drugs.<br />
- 32 -
2.1.3. Penetrant concentration :<br />
Transdermal permeability across mammalian skin is passive<br />
diffusion process and thus, depends on the concentration of penetrant<br />
molecules on the surface layers of the skin<br />
2.1.4. Penetrant solubility:<br />
According to Meyer-Overton theory of absorption , lipid soluble<br />
drugs pass through cell membrane owing to its lipid content while water<br />
soluble substances pass after hydration of protein particles in the cell<br />
wall which leaves the cell permeable to water soluble substances.<br />
2.1.5. Penetrant molecular weight:<br />
Rate of drug penetration is inversely proportional to its molecular<br />
weight, low molecular weight drugs penetrate faster than high molecular<br />
weight drugs.<br />
2.2. Physiological and pathological conditions of the skin:-<br />
2.2.1. Skin hydration:<br />
The moisture balance in the stratum corneum has been attributed to<br />
the presence of a combination of water soluble substances, known as<br />
natural moisturizing factor in the superfacial barrier layers .This factor is<br />
produced in the skin and is responsible for the hydration of the skin.<br />
Hydration of stratum corneum can enhance the transdermal permeability.<br />
Skin hydration can be achieved simply by covering or occluding the skin<br />
with pasting sheeting, leading to accumulation of sweat and condensed<br />
transpired water vapor .Increased hydration of stratum corneum appears<br />
to open up its dense, closely packed cells and increase its porosity<br />
resulting into increased permeation of drug molecules (Scheuplein and<br />
Ross, 1974).<br />
- 33 -
2.2.2. Skin temperature:<br />
A rise in skin temperature has been shown to have a definite effect<br />
on the percutaneous absorption of the drugs .This temperature-depentant<br />
increase in transdermal permeability was rationalized as due to the<br />
thermal energy required diffusivity and solubility of the drug in the skin<br />
tissues. Rises in skin temperature may also increase vasodilatation of the<br />
skin vessels leading to an increase in percutaneous absorption.<br />
2.2.3. Regional variation<br />
The permeation of water varies in different regions of the skin due<br />
to difference in the nature and thickness of the barrier layer (Wester and<br />
Maibach, 1999).<br />
2.2.4. Traumatic and pathologic injury to the skin:<br />
Injuries to the skin that disrupt the continuity of the stratum<br />
corneum are reported to increase skin permeability .The observed<br />
increase in the permeability may be due to the noticeable vasodilatation<br />
caused by the removal of barrier layer (Scott, 1991).<br />
<br />
2.2.5. Lipid film:<br />
The lipid film on the skin surface which contains emulsifying<br />
agents may provide a protective film to prevent the removal of natural<br />
moisturizing factor from the skin and play some limited role in<br />
maintaining the barrier function of the stratum corneum .<br />
2.3. Physicochemical properties of drug delivery system:<br />
2.3.1. Release characteristics:<br />
The affinity of the vehicle for the drug molecules can influence the<br />
release of the drug molecules from the vehicle. Solubility in the vehicle<br />
- 34 -
will determine the release rate of the drug. Generally, the more easily the<br />
drug is released from the drug delivery system, the higher the rate of<br />
tranedermal permeability. The mechanisms of the drug release depend on<br />
whether the drug molecules are dissolved or suspended in the delivery<br />
system and on the interfacial partition coefficient of the drug from the<br />
delivery system to the skin tissue.<br />
2.3.2. Composition of drug delivery system :<br />
The composition of drug delivery systems has a great influence on<br />
the percutaneous absorption of drug species. It may affect not only the<br />
rate of drug release, but also the permeability of the stratum corneum by<br />
means of hydration, mixing with lipids, or other sorption-promoting<br />
effects (Howes et al., 1999).<br />
2.3.3. Enhancement of transdermal permeation:<br />
Transdermal permeation of drugs can be improved by the addition<br />
of sorption or permeations promoters into the drug delivery systems.<br />
Sorption and permeation promoters are agents that have no therapeutic<br />
properties of their own but can promote the absorption of the drugs from<br />
the drug delivery systems onto the skin. Examples of permeation<br />
promoters are organic solvents and surface active agents<br />
3. Methods for studying percutaneous absorption:<br />
3.1. In vitro methods:<br />
The general advantage of in vitro method is to control the<br />
laboratory environment and so elucidate the individual factors, which<br />
modify drug penetration. Those methods are valuable for deducing<br />
physicochemical parameters such as fluxes, partition coefficient, and<br />
diffusion coefficient.<br />
- 35 -
3.1.1. Release method without a rate-limiting membrane :<br />
These procedures record the kinetics from a formulation to a<br />
simple immiscible phase, which is supposed to corresponding properties<br />
with human skin .Such techniques measure drug-vehicle interactions and<br />
the release characteristics of the formulation.<br />
3.1.2. Diffusion methods with a rate controlling membrane :<br />
3.1.2.1. Simulated skin membrane:<br />
Because human skin may be difficult to obtain and varies in its<br />
permeability, many workers use other materials to simulate it such as<br />
cellulose acetate membrane (Gary-Bobo et al., 1969; Diplo et al., 1970),<br />
silicone rubber (Flynn and Roseman, 1971; Bottari et al., 1977; Di colo<br />
et al., 1980), collagen (Nakano et al., 1976), and egg shell membrane.<br />
3.1.2.2. Natural skin membrane:<br />
Excised skin from a variety of animal including rats, mice, rabbits,<br />
guinea pigs has been used. Skin may be used immediately or stored at -24<br />
°C for a long time, and it may be subjected to greater extreme of heat,<br />
humidity, pH, and various fluids other biological tissues without<br />
irreversibly changing its barrier properties. Storage up to 6 months at -<br />
20°C leaves human skin permeability unaffected (Astley and Levine,<br />
1976). Elias et al., (1981) claims that a temperature as low as -70°C does<br />
not affect barrier properties.<br />
3.2. In-vivo methods:<br />
These include:-<br />
3.2.1. Animal models:<br />
3.2.2. Techniques:<br />
3.2.2.1. Observation of physiological or pharmacological response :<br />
- 36 -
If the penetrant stimulates a biological reaction when it reaches the<br />
viable tissue, then this response may provide the basis for determining the<br />
penetrant kinetics. The most productive technique in terms of<br />
biopharmaceutical application is the vasoconstrictor or balancing<br />
response to topical steroids.<br />
3.2.2.2. Physical properties of the skin:<br />
There are several methods used for measuring physical properties<br />
of the skin such as determination of transepidermal water loss, in addition<br />
to thermal determinations, mechanical analysis, and spectral analysis.<br />
3.2.2.3. Analysis of body tissues or fluids :<br />
Urinary analysis is often used to study percutaneous absorption<br />
(Wurster and Kramer, 1961; Butler, 1966; Fledmann and Maibach ,<br />
1965, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1969, 1970 ). Combination of blood, urine, and<br />
faeces analysis was used with rats, monkeys, and human volunteers to<br />
examine the percutaneous absorption and excretion of tritium-labeled<br />
diflorasone diacetate (Wickrema sinha et al., 1978).<br />
3.2.2.4. Surface loss :<br />
Measurements of the rate of loss of penetrant from an applied<br />
vehicle should lead to a determination of the flux of the material into the<br />
skin. The main use of a loss technique has been to monitor the decrease in<br />
radioactivity at skin surface (Malkinson, 1956, 1958, 1964; Ainsworth,<br />
1960; Wahlberg, 1965).<br />
3.2.2.5. Histology<br />
Histological techniques have elucidated absorption profiles and<br />
penetration routes for these few compounds which produce colored end<br />
- 37 -
products after chemical reaction for example, certain drugs change<br />
epidermal sulfhydryl groups in an easily detectable way (Bradshaw,<br />
1961; Chayen et al., 1970) few compounds fluoresce, and their behavior<br />
in skin may revealed by microscopy such as vitamin A, tetracycline, and<br />
benzpyrene.<br />
4. Theoretical advantages of transdermal routes for systemic therapy:<br />
Transdermal administration of drugs possesses several advantages<br />
in therapy compared with oral or parenteral adminsteration (Barry, 1991).<br />
These include:<br />
The avoidance of hepatic (first pass) metabolism by which the liver<br />
enzymes may reduce the amount of medicament passing into the<br />
system circulation.<br />
Transdermal input of a drug would avoid several variables which make<br />
gastrointestinal absorption a problem like dramatic change in pH,<br />
stomach emptying, intestinal motility, and the action of human and<br />
bacterial enzymes and the effect of food on drug absorption<br />
The percutaneous delivery may control the administration of highly<br />
potent drug, produce a relatively constant plasma level of drugs,<br />
concurrent decrease in side effects and improves patient compliance.<br />
The percutaneous administration can be valuable for drugs with low<br />
therapeutic indices and for which significant variation in plasma<br />
concentration are dangerous.<br />
Substitution for oral or potential administration in certain clinical<br />
situations (pediatrics, geriatrics and nausea).<br />
Ease of self administration.<br />
- 38 -
Types of skin preparations<br />
There are a large number of different types of external medicines,<br />
ranging from dry powders through semi-solid to liquids. (Figure 3)<br />
illustrates the formulation of the main types of preparation used on the<br />
skin.<br />
1. Solids:<br />
Dusting powders are applied to the skin for a surface effect such as<br />
drying or lubricating, or an antibacterial action. They are made of fine<br />
particle size powders together with any medicament (Winfield, 1998).<br />
2. Liquids:<br />
Soaks have an active ingredient dissolved in aqueous solvent and are<br />
often used as astringents, for cooling or to leave a film of solid on the<br />
skin. Oily vehicles can be used in bath additives to leave an emollient<br />
film on the skin surface.<br />
Liniments are alcoholic or oily solutions or emulsions designed to be<br />
rubbed into the skin. The medicament is usually a rubefacient.<br />
Lotions are aqueous solutions, suspensions or emulsions that cooled<br />
inflamed skin and deposit a protective layer of solid.<br />
Paints and tinctures are concentrated aqueous or alcoholic<br />
antimicrobial solutions.<br />
Collodions are organic solvents containing a polymer and keratolytic<br />
agent for treating corns and calluses.<br />
Emulsion is a dispersion in which the dispersed phase is composed of<br />
small globules of a liquid distributed through a vehicle in which it is<br />
immiscible by the aid of surfactant but it is thermodynamically unstable.<br />
<br />
pomades and foot washes (Winfield, 1998).<br />
- 39 -
- 40 -
3. Semi-solids:<br />
3.1. Ointments:<br />
Ointments are usually oily vehicles that may contain a surfactant to<br />
allow them to be washed off easily (barrier creams). They are used as<br />
emollients, or for drug delivery either to the surface or for deeper<br />
penetration (Winfield, 1998).<br />
Ointment bases are classified into:<br />
3.1.1. Hydrocarbon bases (oleaginous bases):<br />
These bases are immiscible with water and are not absorbed by the<br />
skin. They are almost inert and absorb very little water from a<br />
formulation or from skin exudates. However, they inhibit water loss from<br />
the skin by forming a waterproof film and by improving hydration, may<br />
encourage absorption of the medicaments through the skin.<br />
The constituents of hydrocarbon bases includes<br />
* Soft paraffin: There are two varieties, one is yellow and the other<br />
(bleached) form is white.<br />
* Hard paraffin which is used to stiffen ointment bases.<br />
* Liquid paraffin: It is used to soften ointment bases and to reduce the<br />
viscosity of creams.<br />
Hydrocarbon bases may contain ingredients additional to<br />
petrolatum, for example, paraffin ointment B.P. is a blend of white<br />
beeswax, hard paraffin, cetostearyl alcohol and soft paraffin (Collett,<br />
1991).<br />
3.1.2. Absorption bases:<br />
Absorption bases are less occlusive than the hydrocarbon bases and are<br />
easier to spread. They are good emollients. These bases absorb water and<br />
aqueous solutions to produce water-in-oil (W/O) emulsions. They consist<br />
- 41 -
of a mixture of sterol- type emulgent with one or more paraffins (Collett,<br />
1991).<br />
3.1.2.1. Non-emulsified:<br />
These constituents include:<br />
* Wool fat (anhydrous lanolin): It can absorb about 50% of its weight<br />
water.<br />
* Wool alcohols: This is the emulsifying fraction of wool fat.<br />
* Beeswax and cholesterol : They are included in some ointment bases to<br />
increase water-absorbing power.<br />
3.1.2.2. Water-in-oil emulsions:<br />
These are similar in properties to the previous group and are<br />
capable of absorbing more water. The constituents of emulsified<br />
absorption base include Hydrous Wool Fat BP (Lanolin) and Oily cream<br />
BP.<br />
3.1.3. Water-miscible bases (Emulsifying bases):<br />
Despite their hydrophilic nature, absorption base are difficult to<br />
wash from the skin. Although they can emulsify a large quantity of water<br />
they are immiscible with an excess. Ointments made from water-miscible<br />
bases are easily removed after use. The three emulsifying ointments from<br />
water-miscible bases, i.e. Emulsifying Ointment BP (anionic), Cetrimide<br />
Emulsifying Ointment BP (cationic) and Cetomacrogol Emulsifying<br />
Ointment BP (non-ionic). These contains paraffins and O/W emulgent<br />
and have the general formula:<br />
Anionic, cationic or non-ionic emulsifying wax 30%<br />
White Soft Paraffin 50%<br />
Liquid Paraffin 20%<br />
They are used for preparing O/W creams and as ointment bases<br />
when easy removal from the skin is advantageous. Other advantages of<br />
- 42 -
this type of base include, miscibility with exudates, good contact with the<br />
skin, high cosmetic acceptability and easy removal from the hair (Collett,<br />
1991).<br />
3.1.4. Water -soluble bases:<br />
Completely water-soluble bases have been developed the<br />
macrogols (polyethylene glycols). The macrogols vary in consistency<br />
from viscous liquids to waxy solids. They are non-toxic and non-irritating<br />
to the skin unless it is badly inflamed. Products with ointment-like<br />
consistency can be obtained by mixing liquid and waxy forms in suitable<br />
proportions. The water-soluble bases have the advantages of being non-<br />
occlusive, miscible with exudates, non-staining and easily removed by<br />
washing.<br />
The macrogol bases, being water-soluble, have the disadvantage of<br />
having a very limited capacity to take up water without a physical change,<br />
They are less bland than the paraffins and reduce the activity of a number<br />
of antimicrobial substances. They may also react with plastic closures<br />
(Collett, 1991).<br />
3.2. Pastes:<br />
Pastes are vehicles (aqueous or oily) with a high concentration of<br />
added solid. This makes them thick so they don not spread and so<br />
localizes drug delivery. They can also be used for sun-blocks (Winfield,<br />
1998).<br />
.<br />
3.3. Gels:<br />
Gels are transparent or translucent, non greasy, aqueous<br />
preparations (Collett, 1991). They are usually used for lubrication or<br />
applying a drug to the skin. Oily gels are also available where occlusion<br />
is required (Winfield, 1998).<br />
- 43 -
Bases for gels formulations:<br />
3.3.1. Tragacanth:<br />
Tagacanth gels are susceptible to microbial degradation and to<br />
changes in PH outside the range pH 4.5-7. Concentrations of tragacanth<br />
from 2% to 5 % produce gels of increasing viscosity.<br />
3.3.2. Sodium alginate:<br />
The viscosity of alginate gels is more standardized than that of<br />
tragacanth. A concentration of 1.5 % produces fluid gels and 5-10 % gels<br />
are suitable as dermatological vehicles.<br />
3.3.3. Pectin:<br />
Pectin gels are suitable for acid products. They are prone to<br />
microbial contamination and to water loss by evaporation and may<br />
require the inclusion of humectants.<br />
3.3.4. Starch gels:<br />
Starch gels are little used dermatological bases. Mucilages<br />
prepared with water alone lose by evaporation and are prone to microbial<br />
contamination. Glycerol concentrations of 50% or greater combine<br />
humectant and preservative functions.<br />
3.3.5. Gelatin:<br />
Gelatin forms gels at concentrations of 2-15 %. Gelatin gels are<br />
rarely used alone as a dermatological base but may be combined with<br />
other ingredients such as pectin.<br />
3.3.6. Polyvinyl alcohols:<br />
Polyvinyl alcohols (PVAs) have been used to prepare gels that dry<br />
very quickly. The residual film is strong and plastic, giving good contact<br />
between the skin and the medicament. The required concentration is<br />
usually between 10 %and 20 % depending on the grade of PVA and the<br />
desired viscosity.<br />
3.3.7. Clays:<br />
- 44 -
Gels containing 7-20 % of bentonite are used as dermatological<br />
bases. They are opalescent and lack the attractive clear appearance of<br />
many other types of gels.<br />
3.3.8. Carbomers :<br />
Neutralized carbomer gels are also used as bases for lubricants<br />
(0.3-1 %) and in dermatological preparations (0.5-5%). These gels are<br />
clear provided that an excessive amount of air is not incorporated during<br />
preparation.<br />
3.3.9. Cellulose derivatives:<br />
These are widely used because they produce neutral gels of stable<br />
viscosity, good resistance to microbial attack, high clarity and good film<br />
strength when dried on the skin. Methylcellulose 450 at a concentration<br />
of 3-5% produces satisfactory gels. Carmellose sodium (sodium<br />
carboxymethylcellulose) is easier to dissolve and the medium viscosity<br />
grade produces lubricant gels at a concentration of 1.5-5 % and<br />
dermatological gels at greater concentrations. Hypromellose<br />
(hydroxypropyl methylcellulose) form exceptionally clear gels which are<br />
used in ophthalamic products.<br />
Hypromellose, short for hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC),<br />
is a semisynthetic, inert, viscoelastic polymer used as an ophthalmic<br />
lubricant, as well as an excepient and controlled-delivery component in<br />
oral medicaments, found in a variety of commercial products (Collett,<br />
1991).<br />
3.4. Emulgels:<br />
Emulgel is a system consists of hydrophilic surfactant(s), oil, water,<br />
and gelling agent. Emulgel bases offer many advantages over other<br />
preparations:<br />
- 45 -
(i) They permit incorporation of aqueous and oleaginous ingredients, and<br />
their rheological properties can be controlled easily.<br />
(ii) They are easy to remove from a container in the desired quantity<br />
without waste.<br />
(iii) Upon application these preparations exhibit good spreadability; they<br />
can easily be applied to the desired part of the body without running or<br />
dripping and they are not tacky.<br />
The selection of oil phase, emulsifier and gelling agent is one of the most<br />
important factors in the preparation of emulgel bases.<br />
* Choice of oil phase:<br />
Many emulsions for external use contain oil which is present solely as a<br />
carrier for the active agent. It must be realized, however, that the type of<br />
oil used may also have an effect on the transport of the drug into the skin.<br />
One of the most widely used oil for this type of preparation is liquid<br />
paraffin. A variety of fixed oils of vegetable origin are also available, the<br />
most widely used being arachis, sesame, cotton seed and maize oils.<br />
* Choice of emulsifying agent:<br />
The inclusion of an emulsifying agent or agents is necessary to facilitate<br />
actual emulsification during manufacture and also to ensure emulsion<br />
stability during the shelf life of the product.<br />
* Choice of gelling agent:<br />
They are different gelling agents as mentioned before. They differ<br />
in their characteristics that affect the consistency of the emulgel (Balata,<br />
1999).<br />
- 46 -
4. Others:<br />
4.1. Submicron emulsions (SME):<br />
SME is liquid dispersion system formed by processing a medium-<br />
chain triglycerides emulsion with high-pressure homogenizer. SME has<br />
microparticles with diameter ranging from 3 to 10 <br />
layers of stratum corneum , increase its fluidity, disrupt barrier continuity,<br />
this result in slow, continuous, and controlled systemic delivery of the<br />
drug (Gupta and Garg, 2002).<br />
4.2. Microemulsion:<br />
Microemulsion is a liquid dispersion of water and oil with<br />
surfactant and co-surfactant. It is transparent, homogeneous, and<br />
thermodynamically stable, which provides sustained release effect after<br />
application on the skin over 24 hours (El-Nokaly and Cornell, 1990).<br />
4.3. Microsponges :<br />
Microsponges are polymeric delivery system consisting of porous<br />
microspheres that can entrap several active substances such as anti-fungal,<br />
anti-infective, and anti-inflammatory. Those systems can be incorporated<br />
into creams, lotions, powders, soaps from which the entrapped substances<br />
are released to the skin in controlled- release manner (Report, 1992).<br />
4.4. Transfersomes:<br />
Transfersomes are vesicles made from phosphatidylcholine and<br />
contained at least one component that controllably destabilizes lipid<br />
bilayers and makes the vesicles very deformable. Such additives are bile<br />
salts, polysorbate, glycolipids, and alkyl or acyl-polyethoxylenes.<br />
Transfersomes are applied to the skin to achieve sustained drug release,<br />
- 47 -
and in this way skin surface acting as reservoir for drug as well as carrier<br />
(Cevc, 2003).<br />
4.5. Niosomes:<br />
Niosomes are unilameller or multilamellar vesicles where in<br />
aqueous solutions are enclosed in highly ordered bilayers made up of non<br />
ionic surfactants with or without cholesterol and diacetyl phosphate<br />
(Namdeo and Jain, 1996). Niosomes are supposed to give desirable<br />
interaction with human skin when applied in topical preparations by<br />
reducing transepidermal water loss and by increasing smoothness via<br />
replenishing lost skin lipids.<br />
4.6. Liposomes :<br />
Liposomes are concentric bilayered structures made of amphipathic<br />
phospholipids and depending on the number of bilayers; liposomes are<br />
classified as multilamaller vesicles (MLVs), small unilamaller vesicles<br />
(SUVs), or large unilamaller vesicles (LUVs). They range in size<br />
from .025 – <br />
regulated by the method of preparation and composition (Kshirsagr,<br />
2000).<br />
4.7. Solid lipid nanoparticles (SLNs):<br />
SLNs consist of physiological and biocompatible lipids, prepared<br />
by several techniques such as hot and cold dispersion of lipids and high<br />
pressure homogenization of melted lipids (Schwartz et al., 1992; Domb,<br />
1995; Westesen et al., 1998; Yang et al., 1999). SLNs posses the<br />
advantages of better drug penetration because their small particle size<br />
ensure close contact to stratum corneum and increase the amount of<br />
encapsulated drug penetrating skin. SLNs provide both burst and<br />
- 48 -
sustained drug release and they can be incorporated into aqueous gel or<br />
creams in which stability is maintained (Gupta and Garg, 2002).<br />
4.8. Microneedles:<br />
Microneedle concept employs an array of micron-scale needles that<br />
inserted into skin sufficiently far that it can deliver drug into the body, but<br />
not so far that it hits nerves there by avoids causing pain (Prausnitz et al.,<br />
2003).<br />
4.9. Metred- dose transdemal spray (MDTS):<br />
MDTS is a topical solution made up of a volatile:non-volatile<br />
vehicle containing drug dissolved as a single phase solution. Upon<br />
application to the skin, evaporation of the volatile component of the<br />
vehicle occurs leaving the remaining non-volatile penetration enhancer<br />
and drug to partition into the stratum corneum during the first minute<br />
after application, resulting in stratum corneum reservoir of drug and<br />
enhancer which releases the drug in sustained pattern (Morgan et al.,<br />
1998).<br />
4.10. Macroflux tehnology:<br />
Macroflux system incorporates a titanium microprojection array<br />
that creates superficial pathways through the skin barrier layers to allow<br />
transportation of therapeutic proteins and vaccines that currently require<br />
parentral administration (Cormier and Daddona, 2003).<br />
4.11. Transdemal drug delivery devices (TDDS) :<br />
1987):<br />
TDDS are broadly classified into the following types (Chien,<br />
- 49 -
4.11.1. Reservoir systems:<br />
In these systems, the drug reservoir is embedded between an<br />
impervious backing layer and a rate controlling membrane. The drug<br />
release only through the rate controlling membrane, can be microporous<br />
or non-porous. In the drug reservoir compartment, the drug can be in the<br />
form of solution, suspension, gel, or embedded in a solid polymer matrix.<br />
On the outer surface of the polymeric membrane a thin layer of drug-<br />
compatible, hypoallergenic adhesive polymer can be applied.<br />
4.11.2. Matrix systems. Drug in adhesive system:<br />
The drug reservoir is formed by dispersing the drug in an adhesive<br />
polymer and then spreading the medicated polymer adhesive by solvent<br />
casting or by melting the adhesive onto an impervious backing layer. On<br />
top of the reservoir, layers of unmedicated adhesive polymer are applied.<br />
4.11.3. Matrix dispersion system:<br />
The drug is dispersed homogeneously in a hydrophilic or lipophilic<br />
polymer matrix. This drug containing polymer disc then is fixed onto on<br />
occlusive base plate in a compartment fabricated from a drug-<br />
impermeable backing layer. Instead of applying the adhesive on the face<br />
of the drug reservoir, it is spread along the circumference to form a strip<br />
of adhesive rim.<br />
4.11.4. Microreservoir system:<br />
This drug delivery system is a combination of reservoir and matrix<br />
dispersion system. The drug reservoir is formed by first suspending the<br />
drug in an aqueous solution of water-soluble polymer and then dispersing<br />
- 50 -
the solution homogeneously in a lipophilic polymer to form thousands of<br />
unleachable, microscopic spheres of drug reservoirs. The<br />
thermodynamically unstable dispersion is stabilized quickly by<br />
immediately cross-linking the polymer insitu.<br />
- 51 -
Diabetes mellitus<br />
Diabetes mellitus is a group of disorders of carbohydrate<br />
metabolism in which the action of insulin is diminished or absent through<br />
altered secretion, decreased insulin activity, or a combination of both<br />
factors. It is characterised by hyperglycaemia. As the disease progresses<br />
tissue or vascular damage ensues leading to severe complications such as<br />
retinopathy, nephropathy, neuropathy, cardiovascular disease, and foot<br />
ulceration.<br />
Diabetes mellitus may be categorised into several types but the two<br />
major types are type 1 (insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus; IDDM) and<br />
type 2 (non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus; NIDDM). The term<br />
juvenile-onset diabetes has sometimes been used for type 1 and maturity-<br />
onset diabetes for type 2 (Martindale, 1996) .<br />
Oral Antidiabetics<br />
If patients with type 2 diabetes have not achieved suitable control<br />
after about 3 months of dietary modification and increased physical<br />
activity, then oral antidiabetics (oral hypoglycaemics) may be tried. The<br />
two major classes are the sulfonylureas and the biguanides. Sulfonylureas<br />
act mainly by increasing endogenous insulin secretion, while biguanides<br />
act chiefly by decreasing hepatic gluconeogenesis and increasing<br />
peripheral utilisation of glucose. Both types function only in the presence<br />
of some endogenous insulin production. More recently developed classes<br />
of oral antidiabetics include the alpha-glucosidase inhibitors, the<br />
meglitinides, and the thiazolidinediones. Alpha-glucosidase inhibitors act<br />
by delaying the absorption of glucose from the gastrointestinal tract;<br />
meglitinides increase endogenous insulin secretion; and<br />
- 52 -
thiazolidinediones appear to increase insulin sensitivity (Martindale,<br />
1996).<br />
1.Mode of action:<br />
Sulphonylurea<br />
Sulfonylureas appear to have several modes of action, apparently<br />
mediated by inhibition of ATP-sensitive potassium channels. Initially,<br />
secretion of insulin by functioning islet beta cells is increased. However,<br />
insulin secretion subsequently falls again but the hypoglycaemic effect<br />
persists and may be due to inhibition of hepatic glucose production and<br />
increased sensitivity to any available insulin; this may explain the<br />
observed clinical improvement in glycaemic control (Martindale, 1996).<br />
2.<br />
Uses and Administration:<br />
The sulfonylurea antidiabetics are a class of oral antidiabetic drugs<br />
used in the treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus. They are given to<br />
supplement treatment by diet modification when such modification has<br />
not proved effective on its own, although metformin is preferred in<br />
patients who are obese (Martindale, 1996) .<br />
3. Adverse effects:<br />
Gastrointestinal disturbances such as nausea, vomiting, heartburn,<br />
anorexia, diarrhoea, and a metallic taste may occur with sulfonylureas<br />
and are usually mild and dose-dependent; increased appetite and weight<br />
gain may occur. Skin rashes and pruritus may occur and photosensitivity<br />
has been reported. Rashes are usually hypersensitivity reactions and may<br />
progress to more serious disorders . Facial flushing may develop in<br />
patients receiving sulfonylureas, particularly chlorpropamide, when<br />
alcohol is consumed .<br />
Mild hypoglycaemia may occur; severe hypoglycaemia is usually<br />
an indication of overdosage and is relatively uncommon. Hypoglycaemia<br />
- 53 -
is more likely with long-acting sulfonylureas such as chlorpropamide and<br />
glibenclamide, which have been associated with severe, prolonged, and<br />
sometimes fatal hypoglycaemia.<br />
Other severe effects may be manifestations of a hypersensitivity<br />
reaction. They include altered liver enzyme values, hepatitis and<br />
cholestatic jaundice, leucopenia, thrombocytopenia, aplastic anaemia,<br />
agranulocytosis, haemolytic anaemia, erythema multiforme or the<br />
Stevens-Johnson syndrome, exfoliative dermatitis, and erythema<br />
nodosum.<br />
The sulfonylureas, particularly chlorpropamide, occasionally<br />
induce a syndrome of inappropriate secretion of antidiuretic hormone<br />
(SIADH) characterised by water retention, hyponatraemia, and CNS<br />
effects. However, some sulfonylureas, such as glibenclamide, glipizide,<br />
and tolazamide are also stated to have mild diuretic actions (Martindale,<br />
1996) .<br />
4. Precautions:<br />
Sulfonylureas should not be used in type 1 diabetes mellitus. Use in<br />
type 2 diabetes mellitus is contra-indicated in patients with ketoacidosis<br />
and in those with severe infection, trauma, or other severe conditions<br />
where the sulfonylurea is unlikely to control the hyperglycaemia; insulin<br />
should be used in such situations.<br />
Insulin is also preferred for therapy during pregnancy.<br />
Sulfonylureas with a long half-life such as chlorpropamide or<br />
glibenclamide are associated with an increased risk of hypoglycaemia.<br />
They should therefore be avoided in patients with impairment of renal or<br />
hepatic function, and a similar precaution would tend to apply in other<br />
groups with an increased susceptibility to this effect, such as the elderly,<br />
debilitated or malnourished patients, and those with adrenal or pituitary<br />
- 54 -
insufficiency. Irregular mealtimes, missed meals, changes in diet, or<br />
prolonged exercise may also provoke hypoglycaemia. Where a<br />
sulfonylurea needs to be used in patients at increased risk of<br />
hypoglycaemia, a short-acting drug such as tolbutamide, gliquidone, or<br />
gliclazide may be preferred; these three sulfonylureas, being principally<br />
inactivated in the liver, are perhaps particularly suitable in renal<br />
impairment, although careful monitoring of blood-glucose concentration<br />
is essential (Martindale, 1996) .<br />
- 55 -
- 56 -
Scope of Work<br />
Sulfonylureas are widely used as oral hypoglycemic drugs in the<br />
treatment of non insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM). Since<br />
sulfonylureas are usually taken for a long period, the compliance of the<br />
patients is very important. Therefore, for the improvement of the<br />
compliance of the patients, the development of a transdermal dosage form<br />
of sulfonylureas was attempted in this study (Takahashi et al., 1997). In<br />
addition, Sulfonylureas have associated with severe and sometimes fetal<br />
hypoglycemia and gastric disturbances like nausea, vomiting, heartburn,<br />
anorexia and increased appetite after oral therapy. The feasibility of<br />
application of transdermal delivery for some sulfonylureas was also<br />
previously reported (Srinivas and Nayanabhirama, 2005).<br />
The present work is concerned with the pharmaceutical<br />
formulation of certain sulfonylureas namely, gliclazide and glibenclamide<br />
in different bases for topical application. The bases include water soluble,<br />
emulsion, oleaginous, absorption, gel and emulgel bases. The in vitro<br />
release of these drugs from the above mentioned bases was also studied<br />
Gliclazide is practically insoluble in water; therefore, the<br />
improvement of its dissolution is an important issue for enhancing its<br />
bioavailability and therapeutic efficacy. Accordingly, solid dispersions of<br />
gliclazide in different carrier systems (PEG 4000, PEG 6000, glucose and<br />
urea) were prepared. The solid phases obtained were characterized by<br />
Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy, differential scanning calorimetry<br />
and X-ray powder diffraction. Solubility diagrams and dissolution studies<br />
were also carried out.<br />
- 57 -
The role of improvement of gliclazide dissolution on the release<br />
rate of gliclazide from different topical preparations mentioned above was<br />
also studied.<br />
Studies have been carried out to find suitable enhancers to<br />
promote the percutaneous absorption of glibenclamide; therefore, the<br />
effect of certain penetration enhancers with different concentrations on<br />
the release of the glibenclamide from water soluble base was<br />
demonstrated.<br />
In vivo experiments were carried out in order to demonstrate<br />
the blood glucose reducing hypoglycemic activity of gliclazide and<br />
glibenclamide systems in both normal and diabetic rats. Drugs were<br />
applied topically and compared to an orally administrated doses.<br />
- 58 -
- 59 -
1. Description:<br />
Introduction<br />
Gliclazide<br />
1.1.Name, formula, molecular weight:<br />
1-(3-Azabicyclo [3.3.0] oct-3-yl)-3-tosyl urea<br />
Figure 10: Structure of Gliclazide.<br />
Molecular weight: 323.4 C15 H21 N3 O3 S<br />
1.2. Appearance, odour and colour:<br />
without taste.<br />
Glz is a white, crystalline, odourless powder and practically<br />
2. Physical properties:<br />
2.1. Melting point:<br />
181°C.<br />
2.2. Solubility:<br />
Practically insoluble in water; slightly soluble in alcohol;<br />
sparingly soluble in acetone; freely soluble in dichloromethane.<br />
3. Pharmacokinetics:<br />
Glz is readily absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract. It is<br />
extensively bound to plasma proteins. The half-life is about 10 to 12<br />
- 60 -
hours. Glz is extensively metabolized in the liver to metabolites that have<br />
no significant hypoglycaemic activity. Metabolites and a small amount of<br />
unchanged drug are excreted in the urine (Martindale, 1996).<br />
4. Mode of action:<br />
5. Dosage and adminstration:<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
It is given by mouth in the treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus and<br />
has duration of action of 12 to 24 hours. Because its effects are less<br />
prolonged than those of chlorpropamide or glibenclamide it may be more<br />
suitable for elderly patients, who are prone to hypoglycaemia with longer-<br />
acting sulfonylURs. The usual initial dose is 40 to 80 mg daily, gradually<br />
increased, if necessary, up to 320 mg daily. Doses of more than 160 mg<br />
daily are given in 2 divided doses. A modified-release tablet is also<br />
available: the usual initial dose is 30 mg once daily, increased if<br />
necessary up to a maximum of 120 mg daily (Martindale, 1996).<br />
.<br />
6. Precautions:<br />
7. Adverse Effects:<br />
8. Interactions:<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
An increased hypoglycaemic effect has occurred or might be<br />
expected with ACE inhibitors, alcohol, allopurinol, some analgesics<br />
(notably azapropazone, phenylbutazone, and the salicylates), azole<br />
- 61 -
antifungals (fluconazole, ketoconazole, and miconazole),<br />
chloramphenicol, cimetidine, clofibrate and related compounds, coumarin<br />
anticoagulants, fluoroquinolones, heparin, MAOIs, octreotide (although<br />
this may also produce hyperglycaemia), ranitidine, sulfinpyrazone,<br />
sulfonamides (including co-trimoxazole), tetracyclines, and tricyclic<br />
antidepressants.<br />
Beta blockers have been reported both to increase hypoglycaemia<br />
and to mask the typical sympathetic warning signs. There are sporadic<br />
and conflicting reports of a possible interaction with calcium-channel<br />
blockers, but overall any effect seems to be of little clinical significance.<br />
In addition to producing hypoglycaemia alcohol can interact with<br />
chlorpropamide to produce an unpleasant flushing reaction. Such an<br />
effect is rare with other sulfonylureas and alcohol (Martindale, 1996).<br />
- 62 -
- 63 -
Introduction<br />
Therapeutic effectiveness of a drug depends upon the bioavailability<br />
and ultimately upon the solubility of drug molecules. Solubility is one of<br />
the important parameter to achieve desired concentration of drug in<br />
systemic circulation for pharmacological response to be shown. Currently<br />
only 8% of new drug candidates have both high solubility and<br />
permeability .<br />
The solubility of a solute is the maximum quantity of solute that can<br />
dissolve in a certain quantity of solvent or quantity of solution at a<br />
specified temperature .<br />
In the other words the solubility can also define as the ability of one<br />
substance to form a solution with another substance.<br />
The substance to be dissolved is called as solute and the dissolving<br />
fluid in which the solute dissolve is called as solvent, which together<br />
form a solution (Anil et al., 2007).<br />
1. Process of solubilisation:<br />
As shown in (Figure 4), the process of solubilisation involves the<br />
breaking of inter-ionic or intermolecular bonds in the solute, the<br />
separation of the molecules of the solvent to provide space in the solvent<br />
for the solute, interaction between the solvent and the solute molecule or<br />
ion (Anil et al., 2007).<br />
.<br />
Step 1: Holes opens in the solvent.<br />
- 64 -
Step2: Molecules of the solid breaks away from the bulk.<br />
Step 3: The freed solid molecule is intergrated into the hole in the<br />
solvent.<br />
Figure 4: Diagramatic representation of process of solubilization.<br />
2. Factors affecting solubility:<br />
The solubility depends on the physical form of the solid, the nature<br />
and composition of solvent medium as well as temperature and pressure<br />
of system (Anil et al., 2007).<br />
2.1. Particle Size:<br />
The size of the solid particle influences the solubility because as a<br />
particle becomes smaller, the surface area to volume ratio increases. The<br />
larger surface area allows a greater interaction with the solvent.<br />
- 65 -
2.2. Temperature:<br />
Temperature will affect solubility. If the solution process absorbs<br />
energy then the solubility will be increased as the temperature is<br />
increased. If the solution process releases energy then the solubility will<br />
decrease with increasing temperature. Generally, an increase in the<br />
temperature of the solution increases the solubility of a solid solute. A<br />
few solid solutes are less soluble in warm solutions. For all gases,<br />
solubility decreases as the temperature of the solution increases (Anil et<br />
al., 2007).<br />
2.3. Pressure:<br />
For gaseous solutes, an increase in pressure increases solubility and<br />
a decrease in pressure decrease the solubility. For solids and liquid<br />
solutes, changes in pressure have practically no effect on solubility.<br />
2.4. Nature of the solute and solvent:<br />
While only 1 gram of lead (II) chloride can be dissolved in 100<br />
grams of water at room temperature, 200 grams of zinc chloride can be<br />
dissolved. The great difference in the solubilities of these two substances<br />
is the result of differences in their natures.<br />
2.5. Molecular size:<br />
Molecular size will affect the solubility. The larger the molecule or<br />
the higher its molecular weight the less soluble the substance. Larger<br />
molecules are more difficult to surround with solvent molecules in order<br />
to solvate the substance. In the case of organic compounds the amount of<br />
carbon branching will increase the solubility since more branching will<br />
reduce the size (or volume) of the molecule and make it easier to solvate<br />
the molecules with solvent.<br />
- 66 -
2.6. Polarity:<br />
Polarity of the solute and solvent molecules will affect the solubility.<br />
Generally non-polar solute molecules will dissolve in non-polar solvents<br />
and polar solute molecules will dissolve in polar solvents .<br />
2.7. Polymorphs:<br />
Polymorphs can vary in melting point. Since the melting point of the<br />
solid is related to solubility, so polymorphs will have different solubilities<br />
(Anil et al., 2007). Generally the range of solubility differences between<br />
different polymorphs is only 2-3 folds due to relatively small differences<br />
in free energy (Singhal and Curatolo, 2004)<br />
3. Techniques of solubility enhancement:<br />
There are various techniques available to improve the solubility of<br />
poorly soluble drugs. Some of the approaches to improve the solubility<br />
are (Pinnamaneni et al., 2002):<br />
3.1.<br />
Particle size reduction:<br />
Particle size reduction can be achieved by micronisation and<br />
nanosuspension. Each technique utilizes different equipments for<br />
reduction of the particle size.<br />
3.1.1 Micronization:<br />
Micronisation increases the dissolution rate of drugs through increased<br />
surface area, it does not increase equilibrium solubility (Chaumeil, 1998).<br />
Micronization of drugs is done by milling techniques using jet mill, rotor<br />
stator colloid mills etc. Micronization is not suitable for drugs having a<br />
high dose number because it does not change the saturation solubility of<br />
the drug.<br />
- 67 -
3.1.2. Nanosuspension:<br />
Nanosuspensions are sub-micron colloidal dispersion of pure<br />
particles of drug, which are stabilised by surfactants ( Anil et al., 2007).<br />
The advantages offered by nanosuspension to increase dissolution rate is<br />
due to larger surface area exposed, while absence of Ostwald ripening is<br />
due to the uniform and narrow particle size range obtained, which<br />
eliminates the concentration gradient factor.<br />
3.2. Modification of the crystal habit:<br />
Polymorphism is the ability of an element or compound to<br />
crystallize in more than one crystalline form. Different polymorphs of<br />
drugs are chemically identical, but they exhibit different physicochemical<br />
properties including solubility, melting point, density, texture, stability<br />
etc.<br />
Some drugs can exist in amorphous form (i.e. having no internal<br />
crystal structure). Such drugs represent the highest energy state and can<br />
be considered as super cooled liquids. They have greater aqueous<br />
solubility than the crystalline forms because they require less energy to<br />
transfer a molecule into solvent.<br />
3.3. Complexation:<br />
Complexation is the association between two or more molecules to<br />
form a nonbonded entity with a well defined stichiometry. Complexation<br />
relies on relatively weak forces such as London forces, hydrogen bonding<br />
and hydrophobic interactions.<br />
3.4. Solubilization by surfactants:<br />
Surfactants are molecules with distinct polar and nonpolar regions.<br />
Most surfactants consist of a hydrocarbon segment connected to a polar<br />
- 68 -
group. The polar group can be anionic, cationic, zwitterionic or nonionic<br />
(Swarbrick and Boylan, 2002). When small apolar molecules are added<br />
they can accumulate in the hydrophobic core of the micelles. This process<br />
of solubilization is very important in industrial and biological processes.<br />
The presence of surfactants may lower the surface tension and increase<br />
the solubility of the drug within an organic solvent (Anil et al., 2007).<br />
3.5. Cosolvency:<br />
The solubilisation of drugs in co-solvents is an another technique for<br />
improving the solubility of poorly soluble drug (Amin et al., 2004). It is<br />
well-known that the addition of an organic cosolvent to water can<br />
dramatically change the solubility of drugs (Yalkowsky and Roseman,<br />
1981).<br />
Weak electrolytes and nonpolar molecules have poor water<br />
solubility and it can be improved by altering polarity of the solvent. This<br />
can be achieved by<br />
addition of another solvent. This process is known as cosolvency. Solvent<br />
used to increase solubility known as cosolvent. Cosolvent system works<br />
by reducing the interfacial tension between the aqueous solution and<br />
hydrophobic solute. It is also commonly referred to as solvent blending<br />
(Joseph, 2002).<br />
3.6. Chemical Modifications:<br />
For organic solutes that are ionizable, changing the pH of the system<br />
may be simplest and most effective means of increasing aqueous<br />
solubility. Under the proper conditions, the solubility of an ionizable drug<br />
can increase exponentially by adjusting the pH of the solution. A drug<br />
that can be efficiently solubilized by pH control should be either weak<br />
acid with a low pKa or a weak base with a high pKa (Anil et al., 2007) .<br />
- 69 -
The use of salt forms is a well known technique to enhanced<br />
dissolution profiles (Agharkar et al., 1976). Salt formation is the most<br />
common and effective method of increasing solubility and dissolution<br />
rates of acidic and basic drugs (Serajuddin, 2007). An alkaloid base is,<br />
generally, slightly soluble in water, but if the pH of medium is reduced by<br />
addition of acid, the solubility of the base is increased as the pH continues<br />
to be reduced. The reason for this increase in solubility is that the base is<br />
converted to a salt, which is relatively soluble in water (e.g. Tribasic<br />
calcium phosphate)<br />
3.7. Solid dispersions:<br />
A solid dispersion may be defined as a dispersion of one or more<br />
active ingredients in an inert carrier or matrix in the solid state prepared<br />
by the melting, solvent, or melting-solvent method (Chiou and<br />
Riegelman, 1971).<br />
3.7.1. Advantages of solid dispersions over other strategies to<br />
improve bioavailability of poorly water soluble drugs:<br />
Improving drug bioavailability by changing their water solubility<br />
has been possible by chemical or formulation approaches (Majerik et al.,<br />
2007; Yoshihashi et al., 2006; Cutler et al., 2006).<br />
Chemical approaches to improving bioavailability without changing<br />
the active target can be achieved by salt formation or by incorporating<br />
polar or ionizable groups in the main drug structure, resulting in the<br />
formation of a pro-drug. Solid dispersions appear to be a better approach<br />
to improve drug solubility than these techniques, because they are easier<br />
to produce and more applicable. For instance, salt formation can only be<br />
used for weakly acidic or basic drugs and not for neutral. Furthermore, it<br />
- 70 -
is common that salt formation does not achieve better bioavailability<br />
because of its in vivo conversion into acidic or basic forms (Serajuddin,<br />
1999; Karavas et al., 2006).<br />
Formulation approaches include solubilization and particle size<br />
reduction techniques, and solid dispersions, among others. Solid<br />
dispersions are more acceptable to patients than solubilization products,<br />
since they give rise to solid oral dosage forms instead of liquid as<br />
solubilization products usually do (Serajuddin, 1999; Karavas et al.,<br />
2006). Milling or micronization for particle size reduction are commonly<br />
performed as approaches to improve solubility, on the basis of the<br />
increase in surface area ( Pouton, 2006; Craig, 2002). Solid dispersions<br />
are more efficient than these particle size reduction techniques, since the<br />
latter have a particle size reduction limit around 2–5 <br />
is not enough to improve considerably the drug solubility or drug release<br />
in the small intestine (Pouton, 2006; Karavas et al, 2006; Muhrer et al.,<br />
2006) and, consequently, to improve the bioavailability (Serajuddin,<br />
1999; Karavas et al., 2006; Rasenack and Muller, 2004). Moreover,<br />
solid powders with such a low particle size have poor mechanical<br />
properties, such as low flow and high adhesion, and are extremely<br />
difficult to handle (Pouton, 2006; Karavas et al, 2006; Muhrer et al.,<br />
2006) .<br />
3.7.2. Solid dispersions disadvantages:<br />
Despite extensive expertise with solid dispersions, they are not<br />
broadly used in commercial products, mainly because there is the<br />
possibility that during processing (mechanical stress) or storage<br />
(temperature and humidity stress) the amorphous state may undergo<br />
crystallization (Pokharkar et al., 2006; Van den Mooter et al., 2006;<br />
Chauhan et al., 2005; Vasanthavada et al., 2004). The effect of<br />
- 71 -
moisture on the storage stability of amorphous pharmaceuticals is also a<br />
significant concern, because it may increase drug mobility and promote<br />
drug crystallization (Vasanthavada et al., 2004; Johari et al., 2005).<br />
Moreover, most of the polymers used in solid dispersions can absorb<br />
moisture, which may result in phase separation, crystal growth or<br />
conversion from the amorphous to the crystalline state or from a<br />
metastable crystalline form to a more stable structure during storage. This<br />
may result in decreased solubility and dissolution rate (Van den Mooter<br />
et al., 2006; Wang et al., 2005). Therefore, exploitation of the full<br />
potential of amorphous solids requires their stabilization in solid state, as<br />
well as during in vivo performance (Pokharkar et al., 2006).<br />
3.7.3. The advantageous properties of solid dispersions:<br />
Management of the drug release profile using solid dispersions is<br />
achieved by manipulation of the carrier and solid dispersion particles<br />
properties. Parameters, such as carrier molecular weight and composition,<br />
drug crystallinity and particle porosity and wettability, when successfully<br />
controlled, can produce improvements in bioavailability (Ghaderi et al.,<br />
1999).<br />
3.7.3.1. Particles with reduced particle size:<br />
Molecular dispersions, as solid dispersions, represent the last state<br />
on particle size reduction, and after carrier dissolution the drug is<br />
molecularly dispersed in the dissolution medium. Solid dispersions apply<br />
this principle to drug release by creating a mixture of a poorly water<br />
soluble drug and highly soluble carriers (Leuner and Dressman, 2000).<br />
A high surface area is formed, resulting in an increased dissolution rate<br />
and, consequently, improved bioavailability (Leuner and Dressman,<br />
2000; Bikiaris et al., 2005).<br />
- 72 -
3.7.3.2. Particles with improved wettability:<br />
A strong contribution to the enhancement of drug solubility is<br />
related to the drug wettability improvement verified in solid dispersions<br />
(Karavas et al., 2006). It was observed that even carriers without any<br />
surface activity, such as urea (Sekiguchi and Obi, 1964) improved drug<br />
wettability. Carriers with surface activity, such as cholic acid and bile<br />
salts, when used, can significantly increase the wettability properties of<br />
drugs. Moreover, carriers can influence the drug dissolution profile by<br />
direct dissolution or co-solvent effects (Pouton, 2006; Leuner and<br />
Dressman, 2000; Kang et al., 2004). Recently, the inclusion of<br />
surfactants (Van den Mooter et al., 2006; Ghebremeskel et al., 2007) in<br />
the third generation solid dispersions reinforced the importance of this<br />
property.<br />
3.7.3.3. Particles with higher porosity:<br />
Particles in solid dispersions have been found to have a higher<br />
degree of porosity (Vasconcelos, and Costa, 2007). The increase in<br />
porosity also depends on the carrier properties, for instance, solid<br />
dispersions containing linear polymers produce larger and more porous<br />
particles than those containing reticular polymers and, therefore, result in<br />
a higher dissolution rate. The increased porosity of solid dispersion<br />
particles also hastens the drug release profile (Ghaderi et al.,1999;<br />
Vasconcelos, and Costa, 2007).<br />
3.7.3.4. Drugs in amorphous state:<br />
Poorly water soluble crystalline drugs, when in the amorphous state<br />
tend to have higher solubility (Pokharkar et al., 2006; Lloyd et al.,<br />
1999). The enhancement of drug release can usually be achieved using<br />
the drug in its amorphous state, because no energy is required to break up<br />
- 73 -
the crystal lattice during the dissolution process (Taylor and Zografi,<br />
1997) . In solid dispersions, drugs are presented as supersaturated<br />
solutions after system dissolution, and it is speculated that, if drugs<br />
precipitate, it is as a metastable polymorphic form with higher solubility<br />
than the most stable crystal form ( Leuner and Dressman, 2000;<br />
Van den Mooter et al., 2006; Karavas et al., 2006).<br />
For drugs with low crystal energy (low melting temperature or heat<br />
of fusion), the amorphous composition is primarily dictated by the<br />
difference in melting temperature between drug and carrier. For drugs<br />
with high crystal energy, higher amorphous compositions can be obtained<br />
by choosing carriers, which exhibit specific interactions with them<br />
(Vippagunta et al., 2006).<br />
3.7.4.<br />
Method for preparation of solid dispersions:<br />
3.7.4.1.<br />
Melting method:<br />
The physical mixture of a drug in a water soluble carrier is heated<br />
directly until it melts. The melted mixture is then cooled and solidified<br />
rapidly while vigorously stirred. The final solid mass is crushed,<br />
pulverized and sieved. A disadvantage is that many substances either<br />
drugs or carriers may decompose or evaporate during the fusion process<br />
at high temperatures. However, this evaporation problem may be avoided<br />
if the physical mixture is heated in a sealed container. Melting under a<br />
vacuum or blanket of an inert gas such as nitrogen may be employed to<br />
prevent oxidation of the drug or carrier. Another disadvantage is the<br />
drug/carrier immiscibility and the consequent irregular crystallization<br />
may lead to only moderate increases in dissolution rate and difficulties in<br />
formulation (Wrenn and Simeon, 1998). Currently, the melting method<br />
is known as “hot melt technology” and provides pharmaceutical<br />
technologists with new possibilities.<br />
- 74 -
3.7.4.1.1. Direct melt filling:<br />
In 1978, Francois and Jones, further developed the solid dispersion<br />
method by directly filling hard gelatin capsules with semisolid materials<br />
as a melt, which solidified at room temperature. Catham 1987 reported<br />
the possibility of preparing PEG-based solid dispersions by filling drug-<br />
PEG melts into hard gelatin capsules.<br />
3.7.4.1.2<br />
Melt extrusion:<br />
Melt extrusion is a new method for producing solid dispersions.<br />
Special equipment is needed to develop the dosage form solid dispersions,<br />
which limits the use of the extrusion method. Forster at al., 2002,<br />
reported the use of melt extrusion to prepare glass solutions of poorly<br />
water-soluble drugs with hydrophilic excipients. It is claimed that the<br />
method is an improvement to existing formulation methods such as spray-<br />
drying and co-melting because it uses smaller quantities of drug reduces<br />
particle size and speeds up the formulation process (Breitenbach 2002).<br />
3.7.4.1.3.<br />
Hot spin melting<br />
method:<br />
A further alternative for processing thermolabile substances is by hot<br />
spin melting. Here, the drug and carrier are melted together over an<br />
extremely short time in a high-speed mixer and, in the same apparatus,<br />
dispersed in air or an inert gas in a cooling tower. Some drugs have been<br />
processed into solid dispersions using hot-spin-meIting include<br />
progesterone (Fricke et al., 1995) and dienogest (Kaufmann et al.,<br />
1995).<br />
3.7.4.2.<br />
Solvent method:<br />
Prepared by dissolving a physical mixture of two solid components<br />
in a common solvent, followed by evaporation of the solvent. The choice<br />
of solvent and its removal rate are critical to the quality of the dispersion.<br />
- 75 -
The main advantage of the solvent method is that thermal decomposition<br />
of drugs or carriers may be prevented because of the low temperature<br />
required for the evaporation of organic solvents. However , some<br />
disadvantages associated with this method are the high cost of preparation,<br />
the difficulty in completely removing liquid solvent , the possible adverse<br />
effect of its supposedly negligible amount of the solvent on the chemical<br />
stability of the drug (Wrenn and Simeon , 1998).<br />
Mallick et al., 2003, prepared albendazole solid dispersions by<br />
solvent evaporation technique using water soluble carriers such as<br />
polyethylene glycol and polyvinyl pyrrolidone.<br />
3.7.4.3.<br />
Melting-solvent<br />
method:<br />
Prepared by first dissolving a drug in a suitable liquid solvent and<br />
then incorporating the solution directly into a melt of carrier. The fluid is<br />
then cooled to room temperature. Such a unique method possesses the<br />
advantages of both the melting and solvent methods (Craig 1990).<br />
3.7.4.4. Other methods:<br />
Other methods for preparation of solid dispersions including co-<br />
grinding ( Babu et al ., 2002 ) , kneading ( Singh and Udupa 1997 ) ,<br />
spray drying ( Palmieri et al ., 2002 ) , freeze-drying (Emara et al .,<br />
2002 ) and supercritical fluid technique e.g.supercritical C02 ( Moneghini<br />
et al ., 2001).<br />
Sethia and Squillante 2004, compared the physicochemical and<br />
dissolution properties of carbamazepine solid dispersions prepared by<br />
either a conventional solvent evaporation versus supercritical fluid<br />
process. They found that, the supercritical based process produced solid<br />
dispersions with intrinsic dissolution rate better than conventional solid<br />
dispersions.<br />
- 76 -
3.7.5. Proposed Structures of solid dispersions:<br />
The physicochemical structures of solid dispersions play an<br />
important role in controlling their drug release. Four representative<br />
structures have been outlined as representative of interactions between<br />
carrier and drug.<br />
3.7.5.1.<br />
Simple eutectic mixtures:<br />
No review of solid dispersions would be complete without a brief<br />
description of eutectic mixtures, which are the cornerstone of this<br />
approach to improving bioavailability of poorly soluble compounds. A<br />
simple eutectic mixture consists of two compounds that are completely<br />
miscible in the liquid state but only to a very limited extent in the solid<br />
state. Solid eutectic mixtures are usually prepared by rapid cooling of a<br />
co-melt of the two compounds in order to obtain a physical mixture of<br />
very fine crystals of the two components. As shown in (Figure 5), when a<br />
mixture with composition E, consisting of a slightly soluble drug and an<br />
inert, highly water soluble carrier, is dissolved in an aqueous medium, the<br />
carrier will dissolve rapidly, releasing very fine crystals of the drug<br />
(Sekiguchi and Obi, 1961; Goldberg et al., 1966). The large surface<br />
area of the resulting suspension should result in an enhanced dissolution<br />
rate and thereby improved bioavailability.<br />
- 77 -
Figure 5: Phase diagram for eutectic system<br />
(reproduced from Castellan, 1983).<br />
3.7.5.2.<br />
Solid solutions:<br />
Solid solutions are comparable to liquid solutions, consisting of just<br />
one phase irrespective of the number of components. Solid solutions of a<br />
poorly water-soluble drug dissolved in a carrier with relatively good<br />
aqueous solubility are of particular interest as a means of improving oral<br />
bioavailability (Schachter et al., 2004). In the case of solid solutions, the<br />
drug’s particle size has been reduced to its absolute minimum viz. the<br />
molecular dimensions (Goldberg et al., 1965). Furthermore, the<br />
dissolution rate is determined by the dissolution rate of the carrier. By<br />
judicious selection of a carrier, the dissolution rate of the drug can he<br />
increased by up to several orders of magnitude. Solid solutions can be<br />
classified according to two methods. First, they can be classified<br />
according to their miscibility (continuous versus discontinuous solid<br />
solutions) or second, according to the way in which the solvate molecules<br />
are distributed in the Solvendum (substitutional, interstitial or<br />
amorphous).<br />
- 78 -
3.7.5.2.1. Continuous solid solutions<br />
The components are miscible in all proportions. Theoretically, this<br />
means that the bonding strength between the two components is stronger<br />
than the bonding strength between the molecules of each of the individual<br />
components. Leuner and Dressman (2000) stated that solid solutions of<br />
this type have not been reported in most literatures.<br />
3.7.5.2.2.<br />
Discontinuous solid solutions:<br />
The solubility of each of the components in the other is limited. A<br />
typical phase diagram is shown in (Figure 6), <br />
regions of true solid solutions. In these regions, one of the solid<br />
components is completely dissolved in the other solid component. Note<br />
that below a certain temperature, the mutual solubilities of the two<br />
components start to decrease.<br />
Figure 6: Phase diagram for Discontinuous solid solutions<br />
(reproduced from Castellan, 1983).<br />
3.7.5.2.3.<br />
Substitutional crystalline solid solutions:<br />
Classical solid solutions have a crystalline structure, in which the<br />
solute molecules can either substitute for solvent molecules in the crystal<br />
- 79 -
lattice or fit into the interstices between the solvent molecules. A<br />
substitutional crystalline solid dispersion is depicted in (Figure 7).<br />
Substitution is only possible when the size of the solute molecules differs<br />
by less than 15% or so from that of the solvent molecules (Leuner and<br />
Dressman, 2000).<br />
Figure 7: Substitutional crystalline solid solutions.<br />
(reproduced from Chiou and Riegelman, 1971)<br />
3.7.5.2.4.<br />
Interstitial crystalline solid solutions:<br />
In interstitial solid solutions, the dissolved molecules occupy the<br />
interstitial spaces between the solvent molecules in the crystal lattice<br />
(Figure 8) The relative molecular size is a crucial criterion for classifying<br />
the solid solution type. In the case of interstitial crystalline solid solutions,<br />
the solute molecules should have a molecular diameter that is no greater<br />
than 0.59 of the solvent molecule’s molecular diameter (Leuner and<br />
Dressman, 2000). Furthermore, the volume of the solute molecules<br />
should be less than 20% of the solvent.<br />
Figure 8: Interstitial crystalline solid solutions.<br />
- 80 -
(reproduced from Chiou and Riegelman, 1971)<br />
3.7.5.2.5. Amorphous crystalline solid solutions:<br />
In an amorphous solid solution, the solute molecules are dispersed<br />
molecularly but irregularly within the amorphous solvent (Figure<br />
9) .Using griseofulvin in citric acid, Chiou and Riegelman (1969) were<br />
the First to report the formation of an amorphous solid solution to<br />
improve a drug’s dissolution properties. Polymer carriers are particularly<br />
likely to form amorphous solid solutions, as the polymer itself is often<br />
present in the form of an amorphous polymer chain network. In addition,<br />
the solute molecules may serve to plasticize the polymer, leading to a<br />
reduction in its glass transition temperature.<br />
Figure 9: Amorphous crystalline solid solution<br />
(reproduced from Kreuter, 1999)<br />
3.7.5.3.<br />
Glass solution and glass suspensions:<br />
A glass solution is a homogenous glassy system in which a solute<br />
dissolves in a glassy solvents e.g. sugars, citric acid. It is often<br />
characterized by transparency and brittleness below the glass transition<br />
temperature. The lattice energy in glass solution is less than in solid<br />
solutions because of its similarity with liquid solutions. Consequently,<br />
faster dissolution rates of drugs from their glass solutions are expected<br />
compared to those from solid solutions (Mummaneni and Vasavada,<br />
1990).<br />
- 81 -
3.7.5.4. Combination of systems:<br />
The possibility exists that some or indeed all systems may show<br />
characteristics of more than one of the above structures. For example, the<br />
formation of eutectic mixtures must involve solid-state complexation to<br />
some extent (Juppo et al., 2003).<br />
3.7.6.<br />
Carriers for solid dispersions:<br />
The carrier used for solid dispersion formulation has been a water-<br />
soluble or water miscible polymer such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) or<br />
polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) or low molecular weight materials such as<br />
sugars. However, the proliferation of publications in the area since the<br />
first solid dispersions were described (Sekiguchi and Obi, 1961) has led<br />
to a broadening of these definitions to include water insoluble matrices<br />
such as Gelucires and Eudragits that may yield either slow or rapid<br />
release. Consequently, the properties of the carrier have a great influence<br />
on the dissolution characteristics of the dispersed drug. A carrier, as<br />
suggested by Kerc et al. (1998), should be: i) freely water soluble with<br />
intrinsic rapid dissolution properties; ii) non-toxic and pharmacologically<br />
inert; iii) chemically compatible with the drug and in the solid-state<br />
should not form strongly bonded complexes that could reduce the<br />
dissolution rates; iv) preferably, can increase the aqueous solubility of the<br />
drug; v) soluble in a variety of organic solvents (for carriers intended for<br />
solvent processes); and vi) chemically, physically and thermally stable<br />
with a low melting point to avoid the use of excessive heat during<br />
dispersion preparation(for carriers intended for fusion processes). With<br />
references to these criteria there now follows brief review of the carriers<br />
described in the literature with particular emphasis on their potentials and<br />
limitations.<br />
- 82 -
3.7.6.1.<br />
Polyethylene glycol:<br />
Polyethylene glycols are polymers of ethylene oxide, with a<br />
molecular weight usually falling in the range 200: 300000. For the<br />
manufacture of solid dispersions and solutions, PEGs with molecular<br />
weights of 1500:35000 are usually employed. As the molecular weight<br />
increases, so does the viscosity of the PEG. At molecular weight of up to<br />
600, PEGs are fluid, in the range 800: 1500 they have a consistency that<br />
is best described as vaseline like, from 2000 to 6000 they are waxy and<br />
those of 20 000 and above form hard, brittle crystals at room temperature.<br />
Their solubility in water is generally good. Furthermore a particular<br />
advantage of PEGs for the formation of solid dispersions is that they also<br />
have good solubility in many organic solvents. The melting point of the<br />
PEGs of interest lies under 65°C in every case (e.g. the m.p. of PEG 1000<br />
is 30: 40°C, the m.p. of PEG 4000 is 50: 58°C and the m.p. of PEG 20000<br />
is 60:63°C) (Price, 1994). These relatively low melting points are<br />
advantageous for the manufacture of solid dispersions by the melting<br />
method. Additional attractive features of the PEGs include their ability to<br />
solubilize some compounds (Fini et al., 2005) as well as to improve<br />
compound wettability (Ambike et al., 2004). Even the dissolution rate of<br />
a relatively soluble drug like aspirin can be improved by formulating it as<br />
a solid dispersion in PEG 6000 (Corrigan et al., 1979).<br />
3.7.6.2.<br />
Polyvinylpyrrolidone:<br />
Polymerization of vinylpyrrolidone leads to polyvinylpyrrolidone<br />
(PVP) of molecular weights ranging from 2500 to 3000000 (Walking,<br />
1994).<br />
Similarly to the PEGs, PVPs have good water solubility and can<br />
improve the wettability of the dispersed compound in many cases<br />
(Mendyk and Jachowicz, 2005). Improved wetting and thereby an<br />
- 83 -
improved dissolution rate from a solid dispersion in PVP has been<br />
demonstrated for tolbutamide. The chain length of the PVP has a very<br />
significant influence on the dissolution rate of the dispersed drug from the<br />
solid dispersion. The aqueous solubility of the PVPs becomes poorer with<br />
increasing chain length and a further disadvantage of the high MW PVPs<br />
is their much higher viscosity at a given concentration (Takeuchi et al.,<br />
2004).<br />
3.7.6.3.<br />
Urea:<br />
Urea is the final product of human protein metabolism. Its solubility<br />
in water is greater than 1 in 1 and it exhibits good solubility in many<br />
common organic solvents. It has a relatively low melting point of 131 °C.<br />
Consequently, both solvent and fusion processes could be used to prepare<br />
urea dispersions. In one of the first bioavailability studies of solid<br />
dispersions, it was shown that sulphathiazole was better absorbed in<br />
rabbits when given as eutectic mixture with urea (Sekiguchi and Obi,<br />
1961). Although urea is not often used as a carrier these days, it has been<br />
shown that the dissolution rate of the poorly soluble compound ofloxacin<br />
can be improved by more than three fold by incorporating it in a<br />
coevaporate with urea (Okonogi et al., 1997). Similarly, urea was used in<br />
combination with PEG to increase the dissolution rate of piroxicam (Pan<br />
et al., 2000).<br />
3.7.6.4.<br />
Sugars:<br />
Although sugars and related compounds are highly water-soluble<br />
and have few, if any, toxicity issues, they are less suitable than other<br />
carriers for the manufacture of solid dispersions. The melting point of<br />
most sugars is high, making preparation by the hot melt method<br />
- 84 -
problematic, and their solubility in most organic solvents is poor, making<br />
it difficult to prepare co-evaporates.<br />
3.7.6.5.<br />
Chitosan:<br />
Chitosan, a derivative of the polysaccharide chitin that is formed by<br />
deacetylation at the N position, has also been used as a carrier in solid<br />
dispersions. It exhibits good biocompatibility and safety after oral and<br />
parenteral administration. Low molecular weight chitosan is a good<br />
candidate as a carrier for enhancing the dissolution and bioavailability of<br />
a number of poorly water soluble drugs (Asada et al., 2004; Takahashi<br />
et al., 2005).<br />
3.7.6.6.<br />
Emulsifiers:<br />
The release behaviour of many drugs can also be improved by the<br />
use of emulsifying agents. Two mechanisms are possible here:<br />
improvement of wetting characteristics and solubilisation of the drug.<br />
Owing to their potential toxicity problems, such as damage to mucosal<br />
surfaces, they are usually used in combination with another carrier. For<br />
example, the release of naproxen from solid dispersions in PEG 4000,<br />
6000 and 20000 could be further enhanced when either sodium lauryl<br />
sulphate or Tween® 80 was added to the system (Mura et al., 1999).<br />
Inclusion of alkali dodecylsulphate surfactants in carrier systems can lead<br />
to conversion of a solid dispersion to a solid solution. Melts of<br />
griseofulvin and PEG 6000 normally contain crystalline areas but in the<br />
presence of sodium lauryl sulphate, a solid solution is formed (Wulff et<br />
al., 1996).<br />
3.7.6.7.<br />
Other carriers:<br />
- 85 -
Many other substances have been tested as carriers for solid<br />
dispersions. A hydrolysis product of collagen, Gelita® Collagel, was<br />
reported to improve the release rate of oxazepam by a factor of six when<br />
prepared as a solid dispersion by spray drying (Jachowicz et al., 1993).<br />
Even after tabletting, the solid dispersion displayed better release<br />
characteristics than the physical mixture or the drug powder alone<br />
(Jachowicz and Nurnberg, I 997). Other materials tested include<br />
phospholipids (Sammour et al., 2001), inulin (Visser et al., 2004), silica<br />
(Watanabe et al., 2003) ......etc.<br />
3.7.7. Characterization of solid dispersions<br />
The methods that have been used to characterize solid dispersions<br />
are summarized in (Table1). In addition to characterizing the solid<br />
dispersion, these methods can be used to differentiate between solid<br />
solutions (molecularly dispersed drug), solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures of drug and carrier. It is usually assumed that dispersions in<br />
which no crystallinity can be detected are molecularly dispersed. The<br />
absence of crystallinity is used as a criterion to differentiate between solid<br />
solutions and solid dispersions (Leuner and Dressman, 2000).<br />
Table 1: Methods for the characterization of solid dispersion.<br />
1- Dissolution testing<br />
2- Thermoanalytical methods: * Differential thermoanalysis (DTA).<br />
* Differential scanning caloimetry (DSC).<br />
* Hot stage microscopy.<br />
3- X-Ray diffraction (XRD).<br />
4- Spectroscopic methods, e.g. FTIR spectroscopy.<br />
5- Microscopic methods: * Polarization microscopy.<br />
* Scanning electron microscopy (SEM).<br />
- 86 -
3.7.7.1. Dissolution testing:<br />
When the goal of preparing a solid dispersion is to improve the<br />
dissolution characteristics of the drug in question, the results of the<br />
release rate experiments are obviously of prime importance in assessing<br />
the success of the approach. A well-designed release experiment will<br />
show whether the solubility of the drug and its dissolution rate has been<br />
enhanced, as well as whether the resulting supersaturated solution is<br />
stable or tends to precipitate quickly. Comparison of results with those for<br />
pure drug powder and physical mixtures of the drug and carrier can help<br />
to indicate the mechanism by which the carrier improves dissolution<br />
(Leuner and Dressman, 2000).<br />
3.7.7.2.<br />
Thermoanalytical methods:<br />
It includes all methods that examine a characteristic of the system as<br />
a function of temperature. Differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) is the<br />
most highly regarded method. DSC enables the quantitative detection of<br />
all processes in which energy is required or produced (i.e. endothermic<br />
and exothermic phase transformations). The usual method of<br />
measurement is to heat the reference and test samples in such a way that<br />
the temperature of the two is kept identical. The additional heat required<br />
is recorded and used to quantitate the energy of the phase transition.<br />
Exothermic transitions, such as conversion of one polymorph to a more<br />
stable polymorph, can also be detected. Lack of a melting peak in the<br />
DSC of a solid dispersion indicates that the drug is present in an<br />
amorphous rather than a crystalline form. Since the method is quantitative<br />
in nature, the degree of crystallinity can also be calculated for systems in<br />
which the drug is partly amorphous and partly crystalline. However,<br />
crystallinities of fewer than 2% cannot generally be detected with DSC<br />
(Kreuter, 1999).<br />
- 87 -
3.7.7.3.<br />
X-ray<br />
diffraction ( XRD):<br />
The principle behind X-ray diffraction is that when an X-ray beam is<br />
applied to the sample, interference bands can he detected. The angle at<br />
which the interference bands can be detected depends on the wavelength<br />
applied and the geometry of the sample with respect to periodicities in the<br />
structure. Crystallinity in the sample is reflected by a characteristic<br />
fingerprint region in the diffraction pattern. Owing to the specificity of<br />
the fingerprint, crystallinity in the drug can be separately identified from<br />
crystallinity in the carrier. Therefore, it is possible with X-ray diffraction<br />
to differentiate between solid solutions, in which the drug is amorphous,<br />
and solid dispersions, in which it is at least partly present in the<br />
crystalline form, regardless of whether the carrier is amorphous or<br />
crystalline. However, crystallinities of less than 5- 10% cannot generally<br />
be detected with X- ray diffraction (Villiers et al., 1998).<br />
3.7.7.4.<br />
Infrared spectroscopy:<br />
Structural changes and lack of a crystal structure can lead to changes<br />
in bonding between functional groups that can be detected by infrared<br />
spectroscopy. Since not all peaks in the IR spectrum are sensitive to<br />
crystalline changes, it is possible to differentiate between those that are<br />
sensitive to changes in crystallinity and those that are not (Taylor and<br />
Zografi, 1997).<br />
- 88 -
1- Materials and supplies:<br />
Experiment and methodology<br />
* Gliclazide was kindly supplied by Egyptian International<br />
Pharmaceutical<br />
Industries Company (EIPICO)<br />
* Chloroform, glucose, methanol and urea (El-Gomhouria Co.,<br />
Egypt).<br />
* Polyethylene glycol 4000, 6000 (Hoechest Chemikalien, Werk Gendort,<br />
Germany).<br />
2- Equipment:<br />
* UV/VIS spectrophotometer (Schimadzu U.V.-1201, Cat NO.<br />
206-62409, Schimadzu Corporation, Japan).<br />
* Thermostatic shaker water bath (Julpo SW 20C, Japan).<br />
* Vacuum oven (Lab-line instruments, Inc., USA).<br />
* Dissolution tester, rotating paddle (Erweka RT6- Frankfurt,<br />
Germany).<br />
* Perkin-Elmer FTIR spectrophotometer (1600 series, Perkin-Elmer<br />
Corporation, Norwalk, USA).<br />
* Differential scanning calorimeter (model 50, Schimadzu,<br />
Japan).<br />
* D-5000 x- ray diffractometer (Kristallofex D-5000 Powder<br />
Diffractometer, Siemens, Germany).<br />
Set of sieves (Mettler, Germany).<br />
Electronic Digital Balance (Mettrt-Toledo, Ag,CH 8606,<br />
Greifensee,Switzerland).<br />
* Buchi rotavapor R-3000, (Switzerland).<br />
- 89 -
3- Software:<br />
Microsoft Office XP, Microsoft Corporation, USA.<br />
4. Methods:<br />
4.1. UV scanning of Glz:<br />
Ten mg of Glz were dissolved in 100 ml methanol to obtain a<br />
solution; 1 ml is diluted to 10 ml with methanol to produce a solution<br />
containing 10 μg /ml of Glz in methanol. The obtained solution was<br />
scanned spectrophotometerically from 200 to 400 nm using methanol as<br />
blank.<br />
4.2. Construction of calibration curve of Glz in methanol:<br />
0.1 gram of Glz was dissolved in 100 ml methanol to obtain a<br />
solution, 2.5 ml is diluted to 25 ml with methanol to produce a solution<br />
containing 100 μg /ml of Glz. Aliquots of 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, and 3 ml were<br />
further diluted to 10 ml with methanol. After dilution, the solution<br />
contained 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 μg/ml of Glz respectively.<br />
The calibration equation was constructed by regressing the relative<br />
absorbances against the corresponding Glz solutionsconcentrations at<br />
227 nm using methanol as blank.<br />
4.3. Construction of calibration curve of Glz in S<br />
buffer of pH 7.4:<br />
0.1 gram of Glz was dissolved in 5 ml methanol, then completed to<br />
100 ml with sörensen’ buffer. 2.5 ml is diluted to 25 ml with methanol to<br />
produce a solution containing 100 μg /ml of Glz . Aliquots of 0.5, 0.75, 1,<br />
1.5, 2, and 2.5 ml were furtherly diluted to 10 ml with sörensen’ buffer.<br />
After dilution, the solution contained 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 20, and 25<br />
μg/ml of Glz respectively. The calibration equation was constructed by<br />
- 90 -
egressing the relative absorbances against the corresponding Glz<br />
solutionsconcentrations at 227 nm using sörensen’phosphate buffer as<br />
blank.<br />
4.4. Preparation of solid dispersions:<br />
Gines’ et al., 1996, stated that, the technology employed to prepare<br />
the solid dispersion, the proportion and properties of the carrier used<br />
present an important influence on the properties of the resulting (SD). So,<br />
in this study different types and proportions of carriers were examined<br />
(Table 2).<br />
Table 2: Types of carriers and their ratios in Glz solid dispersions<br />
and physical mixtures.<br />
Carrier Drug: Carrier weight ratio Solvent used <br />
PEG 6000 10:90 8:92 5:95 1:99 Chloroform<br />
PEG 4000 10:90 8:92 5:95 1:99 Chloroform<br />
Glucose 1:1 1:2 1:3 1:5 1:10 Methanol<br />
Urea 1:1 1:2 1:3 1:5 1:10 Methanol<br />
Types of solvent used in solvent evaporation method.<br />
4.4.1. Preparation of urea solid dispersions:<br />
The calculated amounts of Glz with UR were dissolved in methanol<br />
with continuous stirring in a dish followed by evaporation of the solution<br />
under vacuum at 40°C. Dispersions were dried in a vacuum oven at room<br />
temperature for 24 hr. The dry products were removed from the<br />
containers and ground in laboratory mortar (Etman, 2000).<br />
- 91 -
4.4.2. Preparation of glucose solid dispersions:<br />
The co-precipitates were prepared using solvent evaporation<br />
method. The calculated amounts of Glz and glucose were dispersed<br />
homogeneously in the least amount of methanol at 40°C, and the solvent<br />
was evaporated at 40°C under vacuum. The obtained co-precipitates were<br />
dried in a vacuum oven at room temperature for 24 hr, and then the dried<br />
mass was pulverized (Greenhalgh et al., 1999)<br />
4.4.3. Preparation of PEG 4000 and PEG 6000 solid dispersions:<br />
The required amounts of Glz and PEG 4000 or PEG 6000 were<br />
accurately weighted and dissolved in chloroform. Mixtures were<br />
evaporated using a rotary evaporator at 45°C and further drying was<br />
performed using a vacuum dessicator for 48 hours at room temperature<br />
.Subsequently, the dispersions were pulverized in a mortar (Law et al.,<br />
1992).<br />
4.5. Preparation of physical mixtures:<br />
(PMs) were prepared simply by triturating appropriate quantities of<br />
Glz and carriers using a porcelain mortar and a pestle, then transferring to<br />
a vacuum dessicator until ready for use.<br />
*** All samples were sieved. Powdered samples below 420 um (40<br />
mesh) were stored in closed containers away from the light and humidity<br />
until use.<br />
4.6. Solubility measurements:<br />
4.6.1. Effect of different carriers on the solubility of Glz:<br />
- 92 -
Solubility studies were carried out according to the method of<br />
Higuchi and Connors, (1965). An excess of the Glz (10 mg) was placed<br />
into 25-ml glass vial containing various concentrations of each carrier,<br />
ranging from 1 to 7 %, in 10 ml distilled water. All glass vials were<br />
closed with stopper and cover-sealed with cellophane membrane to avoid<br />
solvent loss .The content of the suspension was equilibrated by shaking in<br />
a thermostatically controlled water bath at 25°C for 72 hr.<br />
After attainment of equilibrium, the content of each vial was then<br />
filtered through a double filter paper (Whatman 42). The filtrate was<br />
suitably diluted and assayed spectrophotometrically at 227 nm to measure<br />
the amount of dissolved drug. There was no interference from all the used<br />
carriers at this wavelength except urea interfered with analysis of Glz,<br />
thus the solutions containing urea were measured against a blank of urea.<br />
The average of triplicate measurements was reported. The solubility of<br />
Glz alone in water at the same temperature was also determined following<br />
the same procedure mentioned above.<br />
4.6.2. Effect of pH change on the solubility of Glz:<br />
The solubility of Glz in Sorensen' phosphate buffer with different<br />
pH ranging from 5 to 7.4 at the same temperature was also determined<br />
following the same procedure mentioned above.<br />
4.7. Dissolution studies:<br />
The dissolution of Glz from the prepared (SDs), and (PMs) was<br />
carried out according to the USP-25, NF 20 (2002), rotating paddle<br />
method. Dissolution medium consisting of 500 ml distilled water. The<br />
stirring rate was 100 rpm and the temperature was maintained at 37 ±<br />
0.5°C. A sample of 40 mg of Glz or its equivalent of the (SDs), or the<br />
- 93 -
(PMs) was placed on the surface of the dissolution medium. At a<br />
appropriate time intervals (5, 10, 20, 30, 45, 60, 90, and 120 min), 5 ml<br />
sample were withdrawn and replaced with an equivalent amount of the<br />
fresh dissolution medium kept at 37°C. The samples were filtered rapidly<br />
through a double layered filter paper (Whatman 42). The filtrates were<br />
suitably diluted and assayed spectrophotometrically at 227 nm without<br />
interference from the carriers. In case of (SDs) containing UR, the<br />
solutions measured against a blank of UR.<br />
The amount of Glz dissolved at different time intervals was calculated<br />
using a standard calibration curve .Each experiment was carried out in<br />
triplicates. The cumulative amount of the drug released was calculated as<br />
follows (AL-Suwayeh, 2003):<br />
Receptor compartment volume = VR<br />
Sample volume withdrawn =5 ml<br />
Sample #1(5min),# 2 (10 min), # 3 (20 min), # 4 (30 min), # 5 (45 min), #<br />
6 (60 min), # 7 (90min), # 8 (120min).<br />
Concentration C1 (5 min), C2 (10 min), C3 (20 min), C4 (30 min), C5<br />
(45 min), C6 (60 min), C7 (90 min), C8 (120 min).<br />
Cumulative amount at sample # 1 (5 min) = VR X C1<br />
Cumulative amount at sample # 2 (10 min) = VR X C2 +5 ml X (C1)<br />
Cumulative amount at sample # 3 (20 min) = VR X C3 + 5 ml X (C1+<br />
C2)<br />
Cumulative amount at sample # 4 (30min) = VR X C4 + 5 ml X<br />
(C1+C2+C3). And so on.<br />
- 94 -
4.8. Fourier transform infrared (FTIR) spectroscopy:<br />
FTIR spectra were obtained on a Prekin-Elmer 1600 FTIR<br />
spectrophotometer using KBr disc method. The scanning range was 400-<br />
4000 cm -1 .<br />
4.9. Differnntial scanning calorimetry (DSC):<br />
The DSC thermograms were recorded on a Schimadzu-DSC 50.<br />
Samples (1.3 mg) were heated in hermetically sealed aluminum pans over<br />
the temperature range 50-200°C at a constant rate of 10°C/min under a<br />
nitrogen purge 30 ml/min.<br />
4.10. X-ray diffraction:<br />
X-ray diffraction patterns were obtained using a Siemens<br />
Kristallofex D- <br />
<br />
of 0-80°.<br />
- 95 -
1. UV scanning of Glz:<br />
Results and discussion<br />
UV scanning of Glz in methanol was carried out (Figure 11). Two<br />
absorption maxima were observed at 227 nm and 273 nm The ratio of the<br />
maxmax 273 nm is<br />
0.825 to 0.034. So, measurements were done at 227 nm (Tadeusz et al.,<br />
2005).<br />
Wavelength<br />
Figure 11: UV spectra of Glz in methanol.<br />
2. Calibration curves of Glz in methanol and sörensen’s phosphate<br />
buffer pH 7.4:<br />
(Figures 12, 13) show a linear relationship between the absorbance<br />
and the concentration of Glz in either methanol or in sörensen’s<br />
max in the<br />
concentration range used.<br />
- 96 -
Absorbance<br />
1.2<br />
1<br />
0.8<br />
0.6<br />
0.4<br />
0.2<br />
0<br />
y = 0.0329x + 0.0233<br />
R 2 = 0.9973<br />
R= 0.9986<br />
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35<br />
Concentration (ug/ml)<br />
Figure 12: Calibration curve of Glz in methanol at max 227 nm.<br />
Absorbance<br />
1<br />
0.9<br />
0.8<br />
0.7<br />
0.6<br />
0.5<br />
0.4<br />
0.3<br />
0.2<br />
0.1<br />
0<br />
y = 0.0361x + 0.0296<br />
R 2 = 0.9887<br />
R= 0.9943<br />
0 5 10 15<br />
concentration (ug/ml)<br />
20 25 30<br />
Figure 13 : Calibration curve of Glz in phosphate buffer (7.4) at max<br />
227 nm.<br />
- 97 -
3. Solubility measurements:<br />
3.1. Effect of different carriers on the solubility of Glz :<br />
In the present study, the solubility of Glz in distilled water at 25°C<br />
was found to be 42.13 μg /ml.<br />
(Figure 14, 15) depict the effect of different carriers on Glz<br />
solubility in distilled water at 25°C. In case of PEG 4000, 6000, the<br />
solubility of Glz linearly increased as the carrier concentration increased,<br />
showing the feature of an AL-type solubility phase diagram (Higuchi and<br />
Corner, 1965) .This result illustrates that the complex formed was<br />
soluble and did not form a precipitate over the range of carrier<br />
concentration.<br />
As shown in (Table 3), the solubilizing power of PEGS slightly decreased<br />
with increasing PEG molecular weight. As the solubility factors were 1.9<br />
and 1.6 for PEG 4000 and PEG 6000, respectively. This is in accordance<br />
with Mura et al.,1999, who found that, the solubility of naproxen is<br />
affected by PEG molecular weight as the solubilizing power of PEG 4000<br />
> PEG 6000 > PEG 20,000.<br />
On other hand the solubility plot of glucose, and urea showed a Bs-type<br />
curve (Higuchi and Corner, 1965). The initial rising portion was<br />
followed by plateau region and finally a decrease in total concentration of<br />
Glz. As shown in (Table 3), the solubility factor were 1.28 and 1.4 for<br />
glucose and urea, respectively. Consequently, these carriers can be ranked<br />
according to its effect on increasing the solubility of Glz as PEG 4000 <br />
PEG 6000 glucose urea. The increased solubility of Glz in carrier's<br />
solution may be attributed to both complex formation and reduction in<br />
interfacial tension of water and hence intermolecular forces and polarity<br />
caused by the presence of these carriers (Al-Angary et al., 1996).<br />
- 98 -
Table 3: Solubility enhancement data of Glz in various carrier<br />
solutions at 25°C.<br />
Item Glz PEG-<br />
Phase solubility<br />
diagram type<br />
Optimum<br />
carrier<br />
concentration<br />
%(w/v)<br />
Solubility<br />
(ug/ml)<br />
Solubility factor<br />
a<br />
4000<br />
- 99 -<br />
PEG-<br />
6000<br />
Glu UR<br />
----- AL AL BS BS<br />
------ 7% 7% 3% 5%<br />
42.13 80.23 67.63 54.3 48.19<br />
------- 1.9 1.6 1.28 1.14<br />
Solubility factor a = Total solubility / intrinsic solubility.
Solubility (ug/ml)<br />
Solubility (ug/ml)<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 1 2 3 4<br />
Carrier % (w/v)<br />
5 6 7 8<br />
- 100 -<br />
PEG 4000<br />
PEG 6000<br />
Figure 14: Phase solubility diagram of Glz in water<br />
at 25°C in presence of PEG 4000 and PEG 6000.<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
Urea Glucose<br />
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Carrier % (w/v)<br />
Figure 15: Phase solubility diagram of Glz in water<br />
at 25°C in presence of glucose and urea.
3.2. Effect of pH change on the solubility of Glz:<br />
Table 4 demonstrate the solubility of Glz in different pH's. Glz<br />
contains an -hydroxyl secondary amine, with a pKa of 7.8. It exhibits<br />
pH dependent solubility. It can be noted that the solubility increased with<br />
increasing pH (higher in alkaline rather than acidic one). This can be<br />
attributed to the effect of pH on the degree of the ionization and hence the<br />
solubility of the drug.<br />
Table 4: Effect of change in pH on the solubility of Glz.<br />
4. Dissolution studies:<br />
pH Solubility (g/ml)<br />
5 40.11 ± 0.26<br />
5.6 52.34 ± 0.22<br />
6 156.77 ± 2.07<br />
6.4 227.4 ± 5.02<br />
7.4 745.5 ± 13.45<br />
The dissolution profiles of pure Glz, its physical mixtures and solid<br />
dispersions with different carriers are shown in (Figures 16-19) Data are<br />
average of three measurements. The shapes of the dissolution profiles<br />
were examined using the following parameters:<br />
I) The initial dissolution rate (IDR) calculated as percent dissolved of the<br />
- 101 -
drug over the first twenty minutes per minutes.<br />
II) The percentage of the drug dissolved after 20 and 60 minutes (PD20<br />
and<br />
PD60).<br />
III) The dissolution efficiency (DE %) parameter after sixty minutes<br />
(Arias<br />
et al., 1995).<br />
The dissolution efficiency can be defined as the area under the curve<br />
up to a certain time. It is measured using the trapezoidal method and is<br />
expressed as a percentage of the area of the rectangle described by 100%<br />
dissolution in the same time (Torrado et al., 1996).<br />
The calculated dissolution parameters revealed that, pure Glz<br />
yielded the slowest dissolution rate with only about 28.4 % of the drug is<br />
dissolved in 120 min. The hydrophobic property of Glz prevented its<br />
contact with the dissolution medium which led to a slow dissolution rate<br />
(Tantishaiyakul et., al 1996).<br />
As shown in Tables 5-8, all (PMs) released the Glz at the faster rate than<br />
the drug alone as reflected by higher (IDR) and greater extent of<br />
dissolution after 120 min. These results can be explained on the basis that<br />
the dry mixing brings the drug in close contact with the hydrophilic<br />
polymer (Van den Mooter et al., 1998). Also may be due to; a possible<br />
solubilization effect by the carrier operating the microenvironment<br />
(diffusion layer) immediately surrounds the drug particle in the early<br />
stage of solubilization (Arias et al., 1996). Indeed, during dissolution<br />
experiments, it was noticed that (PMs) immediately sink to the bottom of<br />
the dissolution vessels as (SDs) do.<br />
- 102 -
Table 5: Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in distilled water from different gliclazide - PEG 6000<br />
systems.<br />
DE*100<br />
(%)<br />
PD60<br />
(%)<br />
PD20<br />
(%)<br />
Composition (w/w) IDR<br />
(%dissolved/min)<br />
Gliclazide powder 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 13.05 ± 1.2 3.83 ± 0.06<br />
Gliclazide-to-PEG 6000<br />
PM 10:90<br />
1.12 ± 0.12 22.58 ± 0.4 38.08 ± 0.19 24.44 ± 0.64<br />
SD 10:90<br />
3.27 ± 0.07 65.53 ± 1.4 72.89 ± 1.5<br />
63.54 ± 1.1<br />
PM 8:92<br />
1.12 ± 0.09 22.59 ± 1.9 36.89 ± 0.18 25.30 ± 0.96<br />
SD 8:92<br />
3.2 ± 0.04 64.04 ± 0.87 69.29 ± 1.76 60.83 ± 0.91<br />
PM 5:95<br />
1.08 ± 0.08 21.63 ± 1.6 38.1 ± 1.2 24.82 ± 1.1<br />
SD 5:95<br />
3.66 ± 0.04 73.25 ± 0.9 93.23 ± 0.42 76.45 ± 0.30<br />
34.76 ± 0.65<br />
89.78 ± 3.48<br />
41.19 ± 0.49<br />
100.49 ± 1.00<br />
35.79 ± 0.48<br />
92.36 ± 1.5<br />
1.79 ± 0.02<br />
4.6 ± 0.07<br />
PM 1:99<br />
SD 1:99<br />
IDR = Initial dissolution rate.<br />
PD20 = Extent of dissolution after 20 min.<br />
PD60 = Extent of dissolution after 60 min.<br />
DE% = Dissolution efficiency after 60 min.<br />
103
plain drug 10:90 PM 10:90 SD 8:92 PM 8:92 SD 5:95 PM<br />
5:95 SD 1:99 PM 1:99 SD<br />
120<br />
100<br />
80<br />
60<br />
40<br />
% Drug dissolved<br />
20<br />
0<br />
0 20 40 60 80 100 120<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 16: Dissolution profile of gliclazide-PEG 6000 systems.<br />
104
Table 6: Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in distilled water from different gliclazide - PEG 4000<br />
systems.<br />
Composition (w/w) IDR<br />
PD20<br />
PD60<br />
DE*100<br />
(%dissolved/min) (%)<br />
(%)<br />
(%)<br />
Gliclazide powder 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 13.05 ± 1.2 3.83 ± 0.06<br />
Gliclazide-to-PEG 4000<br />
PM 10:90 1.08 ± 0.032 21.69 ± 0.65 38.39 ± 0.19 25.38 ± 1.09<br />
SD 10:90 1.62 ± .047 32.53 ± 0.45 42.32 ± 1.5<br />
34.58 ± 0.85<br />
PM 8:92<br />
1.2 ± 0.013 24.13 ± 1.69 36.49 ± 0.18 26.99 ± 1.7<br />
SD 8:92<br />
2.07 ± 0.028 64.04 ± 0.57 50.85 ± 1.76 42.23 ± 0.28<br />
PM 5:95<br />
1.02 ± 0.11 20.75 ± 1.3 33.67 ± 1.2 23.26 ± 1.6<br />
SD 5:95<br />
3.17 ± 0.04 63.49 ± 0.89 64.29 ± 0.42 61.81 ± 0.44<br />
PM 1:99<br />
1.77 ± 0.004 35.41 ± 0.08 43.98 ± 0.49 36.07 ± 1.9<br />
SD 1:99 3.34 ± 0.075 66.94 ± 1.5 68.58 ± 1.56 62.8 ± 1.9<br />
IDR = Initial dissolution rate.<br />
PD20 = Extent of dissolution after 20 min.<br />
PD60 = Extent of dissolution after 60 min.<br />
DE% = Dissolution efficiency after 60 min.<br />
105
plain drug 10:90 PM 10:90 SD 8:92 PM 8:92 SD 5:95 PM<br />
5:95 SD 1:99 PM 1:99 SD<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Drug dissolved<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 20 40 60 80 100 120<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 17: Dissolution profile of gliclazide-PEG 4000 systems.<br />
106
It is also apparent that, the rate and the extent of dissolution of Glz from<br />
(SDs) exceeded those of pure Glz or the corresponding (PMs). The DE%<br />
of (8:92) Glz-PEG 6000 co-precipitate (Table 5), for example, was<br />
60.83%.While, the DE% of the corresponding physical mixture was only<br />
25.3%.<br />
The observed higher dissolution of the prepared (SDs) could<br />
possibly due to the solubilizing effect of the carriers that may be operate<br />
in the diffusion layer immediately surrounding the drug particles. Also,<br />
each single crystallite of the drug was very intimately encircled by the<br />
soluble carrier particles which can readily dissolve and cause the aqueous<br />
medium to contact and wet the drug particles easily (Etman, 2000).<br />
Moreover, it can be generally assumed that the increased dissolution via<br />
(SDs) could be explained on the basis of alterations in the solid-state<br />
structures of the carriers and the drug particles. These structural changes<br />
include the formation of solid solution, eutectic mixtures or soluble<br />
complex between the drug and the carriers and formation of amorphous<br />
drug particles or loss of crystallinity of the drug. For most (SDs), more<br />
than one of these factors may probably be responsible for the dissolution<br />
enhancement (Trapani et al., 1999; Mura et al., 1999). Therefore, the<br />
IR spectra, differential scanning calorimetry and x-ray diffraction patterns<br />
of the pure drug, carriers and their (PMs) and (SDs) were performed.<br />
4.1. Effect of different carriers on the dissolution of Glz from<br />
(SDs):<br />
PEG 6000 had the most influential effect on the rate and the extent<br />
of dissolution of Glz, followed by PEG-4000, glucose and finally urea.<br />
107
Table 7: Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in distilled water from different gliclazide – glucose<br />
systems.<br />
Composition (w/w) IDR<br />
PD20<br />
PD60<br />
DE*100<br />
(%dissolved/min) (%)<br />
(%)<br />
(%)<br />
Gliclazide powder 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 13.05 ± 1.2 3.83 ± 0.06<br />
Gliclazide-to-Glucose<br />
PM 1:1<br />
1.12 ± 0.038 22.51 ± 0.65 32.13 ± 1.03 22.84 ± 0.75<br />
SD 1:1<br />
1.16 ± .045 23.23 ± 0.45 40.1 ± 1.18<br />
25.52 ± 0.05<br />
PM 1:2<br />
1.03 ± 0.067 20.66 ± 1.69 34.18 ± 01.15 24.08 ± 1.4<br />
SD 1:2<br />
1.36 ± 0.028 27.27 ± 0.57 43.51 ± 1.30 29.51 ± 0.51<br />
PM 1:3<br />
1.06 ± 0.025 21.35 ± 1.3 38.53 ± 0.4 25.74 ± 0.54<br />
SD 1:3<br />
1.37 ± 0.027 27.58 ± 0.89 42.16 ± 0.8 32.45 ± 0.25<br />
PM 1:5<br />
1.42 ± 0.022 28.42 ± 0.08 42.76 ± 0.81 30.05 ± 0.43<br />
SD 1:5<br />
1.61 ± 0.075 32.38 ± 1.5 46.58 ± 1.00 35.02 ± 0.79<br />
PM 1:10<br />
1.3 ± 0.006 26.07 ± 0.13 41.68 ± 1.51 31.56 ± 1.29<br />
SD 1:10<br />
1.8 ± 0.004 36.04 ± 0.09 45.56 ± 1.06 37.05 ±0.87<br />
IDR = Initial dissolution rate<br />
PD20 = Extent of dissolution after 20 min.<br />
PD60 = Extent of dissolution after 60 min.<br />
DE% = Dissolution efficiency after 60 min.<br />
108
Plain drug 1:1PM 1:1 SD 1:2PM 1:2 SD 1:3PM<br />
1:3 SD 1:5PM 1:5 SD 1:10PM 1:10 SD<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Drug Released<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 20 40 60 80 100 120<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 18: Dissolution profile of gliclazide-glucose systems.<br />
109
Table 8: Dissolution parameters (±SD) of gliclazide in distilled water from different gliclazide –urea<br />
systems.<br />
Composition (w/w) IDR<br />
PD20<br />
PD60<br />
DE*100<br />
(% dissolved/min) (%)<br />
(%)<br />
(%)<br />
Gliclazide powder 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 13.05 ± 1.2 3.83 ± 0.06<br />
Gliclazide-to-Glucose<br />
PM 1:1 0.28 ± 0.08 5.6 ± 0.60 24.53 ± 1.05 11.85 ± 1.3<br />
SD 1:1 0.68 ± 0.05 13.56 ± 1.005 24.81 ± 1.15<br />
16.49<br />
± 1.03<br />
PM 1:2 0.67 ± 0.016 13.65 ± 0.32 25.8 ± 0.69 16.25 ± 0.02<br />
SD 1:2<br />
0.95 ± 0.13 19.18 ± 1.6 34.31 ± 1.9 22.48 ± 1.6<br />
PM 1:3<br />
0.74 ± 0.033 14.88 ± 0.67 29.01 ± 0.45 17.93 ± 0.64<br />
SD 1:3<br />
1.29 ± 0.07 25.99 ± 1.44 36.45 ± 1.4 27.11 ± 1.003<br />
PM 1:5<br />
0.78 ± 0.01 15.78 ± 0.38 29.3 ± 0.29 18.66 ± 0.09<br />
SD 1:5<br />
1.28 ± 0.07 25.70 ± 1.5 35.06 ± 1.00 26.81 ± 1.79<br />
PM 1:10 1.09 ± 0.05 21.96 ± 1.055 34.9 ± 0.35 25.15 ± 0.52<br />
SD 1:10 1.42 ± 0.03 28.51 ± 0.74 39.18 ± 0.24 31.22 ±1.47<br />
IDR = Initial dissolution rate.<br />
PD20 = Extent of dissolution after 20 min.<br />
PD60 = Extent of dissolution after 60 min.<br />
DE% = Dissolution efficiency after 60 min.<br />
110
Plain drug 1:1PM 1:1 SD 1:2PM 1:2 SD 1:3PM<br />
1:3 SD 1:5PM 1:5 SD 1:10PM 1:10 SD<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Drug Released<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 20 40 60 80 100 120<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 19: Dissolution profile of gliclazide-urea systems.<br />
111
The DE% after 60 minutes was found to be 89.78%, 62.8%, 37.05%<br />
and 31.22% from (1:99) PEG 6000, (1:99) PEG 4000, (1:10) glucose, and<br />
(1:10) urea solid dispersions respectively.<br />
This is in agreement with the results of the phase solubility diagram,<br />
as it was observed that, the solubility of Glz in PEGs solutions was more<br />
than that of glucose and urea. Although the solubility factor of PEG 4000<br />
was more than PEG 6000, it was found that PEG 6000 is a better carrier<br />
than PEG 4000. This is in an agreement with (Mura et al., 1999), who<br />
found that the dissolution capacity of PEG 20000 <br />
4000 although the solubilizing power of PEG 4000 <br />
20000. This may be due to the higher viscosity of dissolution medium<br />
provided by the PEG 6000 than PEG 4000 retards aggregation and<br />
agglomeration of drug particles (Doshi, 1997).<br />
4.2. Effect of carrier concentration on the dissolution of Glz from<br />
(SDs):<br />
The dissolution data of Glz from its different systems suggested that,<br />
drug-to-carrier ratio had a great influence on the drug dissolution<br />
enhancement. For example, the dissolution profile of (SDs) containing<br />
PEG 4000 (Figure 17) show different dissolution rates for dispersions<br />
containing 90%, 92%, 95%, and 99% of PEG 4000. Dispersions<br />
containing 99% of PEG 4000 appeared to be the best preparation showing<br />
a DP60 value of 68.58% which is about 5.25-fold increase compared with<br />
Glz alone.<br />
In case of all carriers (Figure 16-19), the dissolution of Glz was<br />
enhanced as the proportion of the polymer increased. This is consistent<br />
with that reported by Gul and Zhu 1998, who stated that, the<br />
dissolution rate of ibuprofen increased with increasing PEG 10000<br />
loading, and this may be attributed to the finer subdivision of the drug<br />
particles in dispersions containing higher carrier loading. On the other<br />
112
hand, Moneghini et al., 1998 and Chutimaworapan et al., 2000a stated<br />
that, when the proportion of PEG increased, the dissolution was<br />
suppressed. This result could be ascribed to the formation of a viscous<br />
hydrophilic layer around the particles of the drug that slowed the drug<br />
release into the dissolution medium.<br />
It was important to find the optimal drug – carrier ratio in order to<br />
achieve the optimal dissolution profile. When the weight ratio of carrier<br />
decreased below its critical concentration, the concentration being too<br />
small was probably insufficient to enhance dissolution to the maximum<br />
extent hence, as the proportion of carrier increased, the dissolution rate<br />
also increased. Above this critical concentration, as the proportion of<br />
carrier increased, the longer time required for diffusion of the drug from<br />
the matrix probably resulted in a decreased dissolution rate<br />
(Tantishaiyakul et al., 1996).<br />
All data are summarized in Table 9 and Figure 20<br />
Table 9: Collective data for dissolution of Glz obtained from<br />
different carriers used.<br />
System a<br />
% Released b<br />
113<br />
% Increase c<br />
Glz 13.05 -<br />
Drug : carrier<br />
(1:99) PEG 6000 SD 100.49 670.038<br />
(1:99) PEG 4000 SD 68.58 425.51<br />
(1:10) Glu SD 45.56 249.11<br />
(1:10) UR SD 39.18 200.22<br />
a 40 mg of the drug or its equivalent were used.<br />
b After 60 min.<br />
c In relation to drug alone.
10<br />
1:99 PEG 6000<br />
9<br />
8<br />
1:99 PEG 4000<br />
7<br />
6<br />
1:10 glucose<br />
5<br />
1:10 urea<br />
A / B<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
Figure 20: Ratio between % of gliclazide dissolved from (A) drug in different solid dispersions and (B) drug<br />
114
In order to shed light on the mechanism of dissolution enhancement<br />
from solid dispersions, further studies were performed on the investigated<br />
solid dispersions, physical mixtures and individual components. In case<br />
of urea and glucose solid dispersions and their respective physical<br />
mixtures the studies were performed at drug to carrier ratios (1:5), while<br />
in case of PEG 4000 and PEG 6000, the studies were performed at (1:9)<br />
drug to carrier ratio, as higher drug content is more suitable for practical<br />
use (Okonogi et al., 1997).<br />
5. Fourier-transform infrared spectroscopy:<br />
FTIR spectra were performed to investigate the possible type of<br />
interaction between Glz and different carriers (Figures 21-24).<br />
(Table 10) showed that the characteristic shoulders of Glz were<br />
traced at 3274.2 cm -1 (N – H stretching), 3192.9, 3113.2 cm -1 (C – H<br />
aromatic), 2950-2836 cm -1 (C-H aliphatic), 1350, 1164.3 cm -1 (S=O<br />
asymmetrical and symmetrical band) and 1596 (N-H deformation). The<br />
major peak of C=O was at 1709 cm -1 .<br />
In case of PEG 4000 and PEG 6000 systems, the carbonyl stretching<br />
band of Glz that appeared at 1710.3 cm -1 decreased in the intensity with<br />
the disappearance of the aromatic C-H stretching band and N-H<br />
stretching band and predominance of O-H band corresponding to PEGs.<br />
It was concluded from the chemical structures that an interaction of a<br />
significant magnitude could be present between the aromatic hydrogens<br />
of the drug and the hydroxyl groups of PEG, Mukne and Nagarsenker,<br />
2004 attributed the complete disappearance of the aromatic stretching<br />
vibrations of the phenyl group of triametrene by its complexation with ß-<br />
cyclodextrin to be due to the significant interaction between the phenyl<br />
group of triametrene and the cyclodextrin. On contrary, Glz – glucose<br />
systems showed peaks at 3410, 3280, 2943, 2872 and 1709 cm -1 which<br />
were the superimposed peaks of the two components. In spectra of<br />
1
Glz systems with UR, no differences in the positions of the absorption<br />
bands was observed, hence providing evidence for the absence of any<br />
chemical interactions in the solid state between Glz and these carriers. In<br />
the physical mixture and solid dispersion spectra, C=O and N-H peaks of<br />
UR were overlapped with C=O and N-H of Glz, which formed a two<br />
broad bands around 3300 cm -1 . If the drug and these carriers interact, then<br />
the functional groups in the FTIR spectra will show bands changes and<br />
broadening compared to the spectra of the plain carriers (Silverstein et<br />
al., 1991).<br />
2
Table 10: FTIR spectra of Glz solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures compared with individual components.<br />
System Assignment max (cm -1 )<br />
Glz<br />
PEG 6000<br />
Glz – PEG 6000<br />
(PM)(10:90)<br />
Glz – PEG 6000<br />
(SD)(10:90)<br />
N – H (stretching)<br />
C – H (aromatic)<br />
C – H (aliphatic)<br />
C=O<br />
N-H (deformation band)<br />
S=O (asymmetrical and<br />
symmetrical band)<br />
-O-H (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C-O (ether)<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
-O-H (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
C-O (ether)<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
-OH (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
C-O (ether)<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
3<br />
3274.2<br />
3192.9 - 3113.2<br />
2950 - 2867 - 2836<br />
3447<br />
2886.8<br />
1710.2<br />
1112.3<br />
1345.7<br />
1709<br />
1596<br />
1350 -1164<br />
3445.8<br />
2887<br />
1110.7<br />
1344<br />
3446<br />
2888.2<br />
1710.3<br />
1110.9<br />
1345.5
Cont. Table 10: FTIR spectra of Glz solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures compared with individual components.<br />
System Assignment max (cm -1 )<br />
Glz<br />
PEG 4000<br />
Glz – PEG 4000<br />
(PM)(10:90)<br />
Glz – PEG 4000<br />
(SD)(10:90)<br />
N – H (stretching)<br />
C – H (aromatic)<br />
C – H (aliphatic)<br />
C=O<br />
N-H (deformation band)<br />
S=O (asymmetrical and<br />
symmetrical band)<br />
-OH (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C-O (ether)<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
-OH (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
C-O (ether)<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
-O-H (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
C-O (ether)<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
4<br />
3274.2<br />
3192.9 - 3113.2<br />
2950 - 2867 - 2836<br />
1709<br />
1596<br />
1350 -1164<br />
3414.3<br />
2887.6<br />
1110.4<br />
1344.7<br />
3447.2<br />
2887.23<br />
1710.3<br />
1110.5<br />
1345.2<br />
3422.6<br />
2888.0<br />
1710.3<br />
1112.1<br />
1346.2
Cont. Table 10: FTIR spectra of Glz solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures compared with individual components.<br />
System Assignment max (cm -1 )<br />
Glz<br />
Glucose<br />
Glz – glu<br />
(PM)(1:10)<br />
Glz – glu<br />
(SD)(1:10)<br />
N – H (stretching)<br />
C – H (aromatic)<br />
C – H (aliphatic)<br />
C=O<br />
N-H (deformation band)<br />
S=O (asymmetrical and<br />
symmetrical band)<br />
-O-H (stretching)<br />
5<br />
(broad)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
-OH (stretching)<br />
-NH (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
O-H (bending)<br />
-O-H (stretching)<br />
-NH (stretching)<br />
C-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
O-H (bending))<br />
3274.2<br />
3192.9 - 3113.2<br />
2950 - 2867 - 2836<br />
1709<br />
1596<br />
1350 -1164<br />
3411.6 -3316.0<br />
2944.1<br />
1342.0<br />
3410.4<br />
3280.7<br />
2943.4<br />
1709.9<br />
1346.7<br />
3408.8<br />
3276.3<br />
2941.5<br />
1709.9<br />
1348.0
Cont. Table 10: FTIR spectra of Glz solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures compared with individual components.<br />
System Assignment max (cm -1 )<br />
Glz<br />
UR<br />
Glz – UR<br />
(PM)(1:10)<br />
Glz – UR<br />
(SD)(1:10)<br />
N – H (stretching)<br />
C – H (aromatic)<br />
C – H (aliphatic)<br />
C=O<br />
N-H (deformation band)<br />
S=O (asymmetrical and<br />
symmetrical band)<br />
-N-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
-C-N<br />
-N-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
-C-N<br />
-N-H (stretching)<br />
C=O<br />
-C-N<br />
6<br />
3274.2<br />
3192.9 - 3113.2<br />
2950 - 2867 - 2836<br />
1709<br />
1596<br />
1350 -1164<br />
3445.7- 3347.4<br />
1678.8 – 1622.7<br />
1152.4<br />
3446.5-3347.6-<br />
3277.9<br />
1707.4-1682-<br />
1622.8<br />
1162.1<br />
3445.7-3347.6-<br />
3276.0<br />
1708.1-1682.4-<br />
1623.4<br />
1162.4
Wave number (cm -1 )<br />
Figure 21: FTIR spectra of Glz –PEG 6000 systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
PEG 6000; C) PM (1:9) and D) SD (1:9).<br />
7<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Wave number (cm -1 )<br />
Figure 22: FTIR spectra of Glz –PEG 4000 systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
PEG 4000; C) PM (1:9) and D) SD (1:9).<br />
8<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Figure 23: FTIR spectra of Glz –glucose systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
glu; C) PM (1:10) and D) SD (1:10).<br />
Wave number (cm -1 )<br />
9<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Figure 24: FTIR spectra of Glz –UR systems A) Glz ; B) pure UR; C)<br />
PM (1:10) and D) SD (1:10).<br />
Wave number (cm -1 )<br />
6. Differential scanning calorimetry:<br />
10<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
It was the general aim to prepare dispersions in which the drug was<br />
dispersed in as near a molecular state as possible to provide a thermo<br />
energetic state of the drug of high aqueous solubility once the carrier<br />
dissolved. Thermal analysis, especially DSC, had a powerful tool<br />
evaluating the drug – carrier interactions (Nour, 1993). DSC is<br />
particularly useful in determining the solubility of the drug in a polymeric<br />
and is capable of detecting polymorphic modifications. Interactions in the<br />
samples are derived or deduced from DSC by changes in thermal events<br />
such as elimination of an endothermic or exothermic peak or appearance<br />
of a new peak (Ford and Timmins, 1989). In order to get evidence on<br />
the possible interaction between Glz and the investigated carriers, DSC<br />
studies were performed on the prepared physical mixtures, solid<br />
dispersions as well as various individual components. The DSC<br />
thermograms of Glz containing systems are shown in (Figures 25-28).<br />
The heat of fusion and fusion temperature values for the raw materials<br />
and binary systems are represented in (Table 11). The DSC curves of<br />
pure Glz exhibited a sharp endothermic peak at 166.2, which corresponds<br />
to its melting point.<br />
The DSC themograms of Glz-PEG 4000 and Glz-PEG 6000 solid<br />
dispersions and corresponding physical mixtures showed no Glz<br />
endothermic peak but did exhibit the endothermic peaks due to the fusion<br />
of the carriers. This result indicated that Glz might be in an amorphous<br />
state. Yakou et al., 1984, studied the physicochemical characteristics of<br />
phenytoin – PEG 4000 solid dispersion; they observed the disappearance<br />
of sharp endothermic peak corresponds to phenytoin melting point with<br />
predominance of that corresponds to PEG 4000 melting point. They<br />
concluded that phenytoin was uniformly dispersed in an amorphous state<br />
in a solid matrix of PEG 4000. The absence of a drug melting<br />
endothermic peak could also have been due to its dissolution in the<br />
11
melted carrier. Mura et al., 1999, studied the DSC scans of solid<br />
dispersion of naproxen in binary systems with different molecular<br />
weights, they observed the disappearance of the drug melting peak which<br />
indicated the dissolution of the naproxen in the melted carrier. A slight<br />
change occurs in the shape of PEGs endothermic peaks which appeared<br />
broadend in solid dispersions.<br />
In case of UR, no differences were apparent between DSC scans of<br />
the (PM) and the (SD) (Figure 28). In fact, the two systems displayed<br />
two endothermic peaks corresponding to the carrier fusion, whereas drug<br />
endothermic effect was not detected and this may be due to its dissolution<br />
in the melted carrier.<br />
(Figure 27) illustrates the DSC thermograms of Glz –glucose<br />
systems. The absence of of Glz peak and the predominance of glucose<br />
peaks. This suggests that Glz is completely soluble in liquid phase of<br />
glucose (Domian et al., 2000).<br />
12
Table 11: Fusion temperatures (Tc) and heat of fusion (Glz<br />
solid dispersions and physical mixtures compared with individual<br />
components.<br />
System Fusion temperature<br />
(Tc) (ºC)<br />
13<br />
Heat of fusion<br />
(<br />
Glz 166.2 135.38<br />
PEG 6000 60.52 184.49<br />
Glz – PEG 6000<br />
(PM)(10:90) 60.02 169.52<br />
Glz – PEG 6000<br />
(SD)(10:90) 59.42 180.55<br />
PEG 4000 60.52 192.58<br />
Glz – PEG 4000<br />
(PM)(10:90) 60.38 162.52<br />
Glz – PEG 4000<br />
(SD)(10:90) 59.97 167.82<br />
Glu 156.13 223.18<br />
Glz – glu (PM)<br />
(1:10)<br />
Glz – glu (SD)<br />
(1:10)<br />
154<br />
182.46<br />
153.21<br />
183.65<br />
193.21<br />
42.72<br />
194.19<br />
58.26<br />
UR 132.97 225.17<br />
Glz – UR (PM)<br />
(1:10)<br />
Glz – UR (SD)<br />
(1:10)<br />
131.12<br />
192.52<br />
132.23<br />
181.92<br />
176<br />
110.56<br />
170.97<br />
73.12
Temp (c)<br />
Figure 25: DSC spectra of Glz –PEG 6000 systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
PEG 6000; C) PM (1:9) and D) SD (1:9).<br />
14<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Temp (c)<br />
Figure 26: DSC spectra of Glz –PEG 4000 systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
PEG 4000; C) PM (1:9) and D) SD (1:9).<br />
15<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Figure 27: DSC spectra of Glz –glucose systems A) Glz; B) pure glu;<br />
C) PM (1:5) and D) SD (1:5).<br />
Temp(c)<br />
16<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Figure 28: DSC spectra of Glz –UR systems A) Glz ; B) pure UR; C)<br />
PM (1:5) and D) SD (1:5).<br />
Temp (c)<br />
17<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
7. X-ray diffraction:<br />
The x-ray diffractuion patterns of Glz, PEG 4000, PEG 6000, glu,<br />
UR, physical mixtures and solid dispersions were illustrated in (Figures<br />
29-32). Their characteristic peaks and intensities are presented in (Table<br />
12)<br />
Glz was a highly crystalline powder with characteristic diffraction<br />
<br />
addition there were some other peaks of lower intensity.<br />
In case of untreated PEG 6000, there were sharp peaks at 19° and<br />
23.12°, while in case of PEG 4000 the diffraction peaks were traced at<br />
19.016° and 23.217°. The diffraction patterns of PEG 6000 and PEG<br />
4000 solid dispersions and physical mixtures are nearly identical to that<br />
of untreated ones. The peaks of Glz were completely missed thus<br />
indicating that Glz was in amorphous form. This was in line with our<br />
findings from FTIR analysis where interactions might be present between<br />
the drug and either of these two carriers.<br />
Glucose and urea in pure form revealed high degree of crystallinity.<br />
X-ray patterns of glucose solid dispersions and physical mixtures showed<br />
the superimposed diffraction peaks of both drug and carrier with<br />
reduction in their intensities. On other hand , in case of urea solid<br />
dispersion and physical mixture, the diffraction peaks of Glz was not<br />
observed whereas the diffraction peaks of urea was noted. This indicated<br />
that Glz was in amorphous state (Okonogi et al., 1997).<br />
18
Table 12: Intensities at characteristic differº) for some gliclazide solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures compared with individual components.<br />
System intensity intensity intensity intensity intensity intensity<br />
Gliclazide 14.58 33.1 19.68 43.1 20.12 36.9 20.58 100 22.72 24.9 28.4 35.5<br />
PEG 6000 19 86.5 23.12 100<br />
Glic-PEG 6000<br />
(10:90) (PM) 19.03 89.1 23.12 100<br />
Glic-PEG 6000<br />
(10:90) (SD) 19.03 100 23.21 97.6<br />
PEG 4000 19.016 100 23.217 90.6<br />
Glic-PEG 6000<br />
(10:90) (PM) 19.1 99.7 23.26 100<br />
Glic-PEG 6000<br />
(10:90) (SD) 19.02 92.4 23.2 100<br />
19
Cont.Table 12:º) for some gliclazide solid dispersions and physical<br />
mixtures compared with individual components.<br />
System intensity intensity intensity intensity intensity intensity<br />
Gliclazide 14.58 33.1 19.68 43.1 20.12 36.9 20.58 100 22.72 24.9 28.4 35.5<br />
Glucose 20.52 100 25.38 30.9 17.01 44 28.39 64.2<br />
Glic-glucose<br />
(1:10) (PM) 20.74 37.2 14.39 92.2 17.055 57.7 10.74 100 18.15 70.3 22.014 30.1<br />
Glic- glucose<br />
(1:10) (SD) 20.57 100 14.62 25.2 17.067 25.5 28.4 35 19.72 7.2 22.017 17.1<br />
Urea 22.044 100 28.4 35<br />
Glic-urea<br />
(1:10) (PM) 22.22 96.3 22 45.7 31.47 100 35.47 36.9<br />
Glic-urea<br />
(1:10) (SD) 22.15 100 35.17 57<br />
20
2-Theta-Scale<br />
Figure 29: X-ray spectra of Glz –PEG 6000 systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
PEG 6000; C) PM (1:9) and D) SD (1:9).<br />
21<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
2-Theta-Scale<br />
Figure 30: X-ray spectra of Glz –PEG 4000 systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
PEG 4000; C) PM (1:9) and D) SD (1:9).<br />
22<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Figure 31: X-ray spectra of Glz –glucose systems A) Glz ; B) pure<br />
glu; C) PM (1:5) and D) SD (1:5).<br />
2-Theta-Scale<br />
23<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Figure 32: X-ray spectra of Glz –UR systems A) Glz ; B) pure UR; C)<br />
PM (1:5) and D) SD (1:5).<br />
2-Theta-Scale<br />
24<br />
D<br />
C<br />
B<br />
A
Conclusion:<br />
1- The preparation of Glz solid dispersions was examined with<br />
different carriers.<br />
2- The proportion and properties of the carrier used present an important<br />
influence on the properties of the resulting soild dispersions<br />
3- PEG 4000, PEG 6000, glucose and UR were used as carriers, led to an<br />
increase in the dissolution rate of Glz .<br />
4- FTIR, DSC and XRD diffraction revealed an interaction between<br />
Glz and PEG 4000 and PEG 6000, with possibility of a<br />
polymorphic change in Glz for all systems used.<br />
25
Introduction<br />
Percutaneous penetration involves drug dissolution in the vehicle,<br />
diffusion of the solubilized drug from the vehicle to the surface of the<br />
skin and drug penetration through skin layers. Selection of the<br />
appropriate vehicle and modification of drug characteristics may improve<br />
penetration (Mario et al., 2005).<br />
Permeation of the drug from prepared systems in donor<br />
compartment through a semipermeable membrane involves three<br />
consecutive processes: first, dissolution of the solid dispersed particles,<br />
then diffusion of the drug across the dissolution media, and finally its<br />
permeation through the membrane. All three processes make a<br />
contribution to the overall diffusion rate (Mario et al., 2005).<br />
To improve the release rate of the drug, solid dispersions were<br />
incorporated into the topical bases. The effectiveness of incorporation of<br />
solid dispersions in topical formulations on the release of the Glz was<br />
determined by comparing the percent of the drug released after six hours<br />
in presence and absence of solid dispersions.<br />
27
1- Materials and supplies:<br />
Experiment and methodology<br />
* Hydroxy propylmethyl cellulose 50 cp (HPMC) (Sigma<br />
Chemical, St.Louis, MO, USA)<br />
* White soft paraffin, wool fat, cetyl alcohol, propylene glycol,<br />
sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS), polyethylene glycol 400, liquid<br />
paraffin, hard paraffin and borax (El-Nasr CO. Cairo, Egypt).<br />
* Octanol , span 80 (Merk Sharp and Dohmn, Germany)<br />
* White beeswax, gum acacia (El-Gomhouria Co.,Egypt).<br />
* Glucose- LS, GOD-PAP, Modern Laboratory Chemicals, Egypt.<br />
* Streptozotocin (Sigma Chemical Company,USA).<br />
* Other materials were mentioned previously in chapter one.<br />
2- Equipment:<br />
* Diffusion glass cell, this is composed of an open ends glass<br />
tube with 2.9 cm as external diameter, 2.6 cm as internal<br />
diameter and length of 30 cm. Semipermeable cellophane<br />
membrane was stretched over one open end of glass tube and<br />
made watertight by a rubber band.<br />
* Viscometer (Fungi lab S.A, Spain).<br />
* Eppendorf Centrifuge 5415 C (maximum speed 14000 min -1 ), West<br />
Germany.<br />
* UV/VIS Spectrophotometer (Jenway, 6105).<br />
* PH meter (Cole-Parmer Instrument Co USA).<br />
* On Call EZ Blood Glucose Meter (San Diego, CA 92121, USA).<br />
* Other equipments were mentioned previously in chapter one.<br />
3- Software:<br />
Microsoft Office XP, Microsoft Corporation, USA.<br />
28
SPSS statistics Package, SPSS Institute Inc., Cary, USA.<br />
4. Methods:<br />
4.1. Determination of partition coefficient of Glz:<br />
*** Preparation of saturated solution of the drug:<br />
An excess of the Glz (10 mg) was placed into 25-ml glass vial<br />
containing 10 ml distilled water. The glass vials was closed with stopper<br />
and cover-sealed with cellophane membrane to avoid solvent loss .The<br />
content of the suspension was equilibrated by shaking in a<br />
thermostatically controlled water bath at 25°C for 7 days. After<br />
attainment of equilibrium, the content of the vial was then filtered<br />
through a double filter paper (Whatman 42).The filtrate was assayed<br />
spectrophotometrically at 227 nm to measure the amount of the drug.<br />
*** Method:<br />
In glass vials 5 ml of saturated solution of the drug were added to 5<br />
ml of n-octanol. The vials were placed in a thermostatically controlled<br />
water bath at 25°C for 24 hrs. The aqueous phase was separated from the<br />
oily phase by the separating funnel and the amount of the drug in aqueous<br />
phase was assayed spectrophotometerically at 227 nm using distilled<br />
water as blank. The concentration of the drug was obtained from a<br />
previously constructed calibration curve. Partition coefficient of Glz in<br />
octanol/water system was determined according to the following equation<br />
(El-Nahas, 2001):<br />
Conc. of Glz in oily phase<br />
Partition coefficient = --------------------------------------------<br />
Conc. of Glz in aqueous phase<br />
29
4.2. Preparation of solid dispersions:<br />
Solid dispersions of Glz with each of PEG 6000, PEG 4000, urea<br />
and glucose were prepared at weight ratios of 8:92 (drug:carrier) for<br />
PEGs (SDs) and 1:10 (drug:carrier) for urea and glucose SDs. The<br />
amount of SDs introduced was adjusted to maintain the drug<br />
concentration at 1% in the formulations.<br />
4.3. The methods of preparation of topical preparations:<br />
The following formulae were selected in which 10 mg of Glz, or its<br />
equivalent of (SDs) was incorporated in each one gram of the topical<br />
formula. In case of urea and glucose, (SDs) that demonstrated the best<br />
dissolution properties, (1:10) drug to carrier ratio, were used. However in<br />
case of PEG 4000 and PEG 6000, (SDs) of (8:92) drug to carrier ratio<br />
were used because the ratio of (1:99) that gave the highest dissolution<br />
was not practically suitable for incorporation into the base due to higher<br />
powder content.<br />
4.3.1. Water soluble base:<br />
Polyethylene glycol base :( U.S.P. XXII).<br />
- PEG 4000 40 gm<br />
- PEG 400 60 gm<br />
Preparation:<br />
PEG 4000 was melted at 60° C on a water bath. Then PEG 400<br />
containing the drug or the solid dispersion was added. The mixture was<br />
continuously stirred until congealed and packed in a plastic jar and stored<br />
at ambient temperature until used.<br />
4.3.2. Absorption base (B.P. 1963):<br />
- Wool fat 5 gm<br />
-Cetyl alcohol 5 gm<br />
-Hard paraffin 5 gm<br />
30
-White soft paraffin 85 gm.<br />
Preparation:<br />
Accurate amount of the drug or the solid dispersion was weighed,<br />
levigated and incorporated into the melted base with continuous stirring<br />
until congealed then packed into plastic jar until used.<br />
4.3.3. Emulsion bases:<br />
O/W emulsion base (Beeler’s base) (Ezzedeen et al., 1986).<br />
-White bees wax 1 gm<br />
-Cetyl alcohol 15 gm<br />
-Propylene glycol 10 gm<br />
-Sodium lauryl sulphate 2 gm.<br />
-Water 72 gm.<br />
W/O emulsion base: (Ezzedeen et al., 1986).<br />
-Liquid paraffin 45 gm<br />
-White bees wax 10 gm<br />
- Wool fat 2 gm<br />
- Borax 8 gm<br />
-Water 41 gm<br />
- Span 80 1 gm<br />
Preparation:<br />
The aqueous phase and the oil phase were placed in separate<br />
containers and heated at 70°C .The drug was dissolved in the oily phase.<br />
Then the aqueous phase was added to the oil phase at the same<br />
temperature with continuous stirring until cool and congealed<br />
31
4.3.4. Hydroxy propyl methylcellulose gel (Sobati, 1998):<br />
- HPMC 12 gm<br />
- Water 88 gm<br />
Preparation:<br />
The drug was dispersed in a quantity of water then the gelling agent<br />
was added with continuous stirring, set aside for complete swelling and<br />
the weight was adjusted by the addition of the water.<br />
All the formulations mentioned previously were summarized in<br />
(Table13)<br />
4.4. In vitro release of Glz from different topical formulations:<br />
The release study was determined using the simple dialysis<br />
technique. In this method, 1 gm of the tested formulation containing (10<br />
mg of the drug) was accurately weighed over the cellophane membrane<br />
which previously soaked in the phosphate buffer pH 7.4 for 30 minutes,<br />
the loaded membrane was stretched over the end of a glass tube of about<br />
2.9 cm as external diameter, and 2.6 cm as internal diameter as shown in<br />
(Figure 33) (Donor).<br />
The diffusion cell was placed at the center of 1000 ml dissolution cell<br />
containing 100 ml of phosphate buffer pH 7.4. The donor was suspended<br />
in the acceptor in such a manner that the membrane was located just<br />
below the surface of the sink condition. The stirring rate was 100 rpm and<br />
the temperature was maintained at 37 ± 0.5 °C. At suitable time intervals<br />
(30, 60, 90,120,150,180, 240,300 and 360 minutes), 2.5 ml sample was<br />
withdrawn from the sink solution and replaced with an equivalent amount<br />
of the fresh release medium kept at 37 °C, diluted with methanol and<br />
assayed spectrophotometerically at 227 nm using a suitable blank.<br />
32
Each experiment was done in triplicate, and the average was calculated.<br />
The cumulative amount of the drug released was calculated as mentioned<br />
before.<br />
33
Figure 33: Diagrammatic representation of the drug diffusion<br />
apparatus.<br />
34
4.5. Effect of incorporation of solid dispersions in different topical<br />
preparations:<br />
Previously prepared solid dispersions were incorporated in the<br />
topical formulations that demonstrated the best release results (water<br />
soluble base, HPMC gel and O/W cream).In vitro release of these<br />
preparation were done as mentioned above.<br />
4.6. Detrmination of viscosity of topical different bases:<br />
The viscosity of each of PEG bases, O/W cream and HPMC gel which<br />
contains Glz :PEG 4000 (8:92)SD and Glz : glu (1:10) SD was<br />
determined at room temperature, using spindle number 5 at 2 r.p.m (El-<br />
Megrab et al., 2006).<br />
4.7. Kinetic evaluation of the in vitro release data:<br />
The data obtained from the experiments were analyzed to know the<br />
mechanism of the release of the drug using the following kinetic<br />
equations:<br />
(I) Zero order kinetics:<br />
A=A-k<br />
Where A<br />
A = drug concentration at time (t).<br />
t = time interval.<br />
k<br />
When this linear equation is plotted with the percent of drug remained on<br />
the vertical axis and (t) on the horizontal axis, a straight line would be<br />
obtained with (R) correlation coefficient, a slope equal to (-k<br />
intercept equal to (A<br />
35
Half time: is the time required for a drug to decompose to one half of the<br />
original concentration or it is the time at which A is decreased to 1 /2 A<br />
(Martin, 1994 ).<br />
(II) First order kinetics:<br />
t1/2 = A<br />
ln A = ln A- kt<br />
log A = log A- kt/ 2.303<br />
Where A<br />
A = drug concentration at time (t).<br />
t = time interval.<br />
k<br />
When this linear equation is plotted with the logarithm amount of percent<br />
drug remained on the vertical axis and (t) on the horizontal axis, a straight<br />
line would be obtained with (R) correlation coefficient, a slope equal to (-<br />
kt/ 2.303) and an intercept equal to (log A(Martin, 1994 ).<br />
The half life for first order kinetics equal to<br />
(III) Higuchi diffusion model:<br />
t1/2 = 0.693 / k.<br />
i) The diffusion occurs in a direction opposite to that of increasing<br />
concentration. That is to say, diffusion occurs in the direction of<br />
decreasing concentration of diffusant, Fick <br />
diffusion (Martin, 1994). A simplified Higuchi diffusion<br />
equation for drug released from topical preparation is.<br />
M = Q = 2C ½<br />
36
Where:<br />
M = Q = amount of the drug released into the receptor phase at time t.<br />
C<br />
<br />
t = time of release.<br />
D = diffusion coefficient of the drug.<br />
This equation describes drug release as being linear with the square root<br />
of the time<br />
Q = k t ½<br />
4.8. In vitro permeation of Glz through abdominal rabbit skin:<br />
4.8.1. Preparation of rabbit skin:<br />
The abdomen of white male rabbits (Jia-You et al., 1996; Hosny et<br />
al., 1998), weighing 2-3 Kg, were shaved by an electric hair clipper. The<br />
rabbit was scarified; the skin then excised surgically, without injury. The<br />
dermal side of the skin was carefully cleared of adhering blood vessels,<br />
fats or subcutaneous tissues using fine-point forceps and surgical scissors<br />
and washed with distilled water (Ceschel et al., 1999). The skin was<br />
stored and frozen. The frozen skin was thawed prior to cutting into pieces<br />
for experimental studies. The pieces of the skin were equilibrated by<br />
soaking in sörensen’ phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) for about one hour before<br />
the beginning of each experiment (Larrucea et al., 2001).<br />
4.8.2. In vitro permeation studies:<br />
In vitro permeation studies of Glz and Glz solid dispersions from<br />
different topical formulations were carried out utilizing locally fabricated<br />
diffusion cell. The excised rabbit skin was mounted on one end of the<br />
37
vertical diffusion cell (internal diameter 2.6 cm) by a rubber band with<br />
the sratum corneum side facing the donner compartment and the dermal<br />
side facing the receptor compartment, and the total area available for<br />
penetration was 5.3 cm 2 . Several drug concentrations ranging from 10 to<br />
50 mg of Glz per one gram of the formulation were applied on the<br />
stratum corneum. The diffusion cell was hanged into the center of the<br />
glass beaker, containing 100 ml of sörensen’ phosphate buffer (pH 7.4)<br />
(Mura et al., 2000; Ghazy et al., 2004) in such way that, the dermal<br />
surface was just flushed to the permeation fluid (Fang et al., 2003).The<br />
permeation fluid was maintained at 37°C ± 0.5°C and stirred at 100 rpm<br />
in thermostatically controlled water bath (Tehrani and Mehramizi,<br />
2000).To avoid evaporation, the beaker was kept covered during the<br />
experiment. Four-millimeter samples were withdrawn from the receptor<br />
phase at specified time intervals and immediately replaced by an equal<br />
volume of fresh buffer solution (pH 7.4) at the same temperature (37°C ±<br />
0.5°C) to maintain the volume of the receptor phase constant during the<br />
experiment . The samples were analyzed spectrophotometrically at 227<br />
nm against sörensen’ phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) as a blank (Larrucea et<br />
al., 2001). Each experiment was performed three times and the average<br />
was calculated. The cumulative amount of the drug permeated was<br />
calculated as mentioned before.<br />
4.8.3. Statistical analysis:<br />
Data were expressed as mean of three experiments ± the standard<br />
error (S.E.). The obtained data were compared statistically using One-<br />
way analysis of variance (ANOVA) test of significance on a computer<br />
statistical SPSS analysis program. A p-value of 0.05 or less was<br />
considered to be significant (Suwanpidokkul et al., 2004).<br />
38
4.9. In vivo studies:<br />
4.9.1. Animals:<br />
The animals used for the anti-diabetic and hypoglycemic activity<br />
study were white adult albino rats weighing between 200-250 gm. The<br />
animals were housed under standard laboratory conditions.<br />
4.9.2. Hypoglycemic activity in normal rats:<br />
The hair on the backside of the rats was removed with an electric hair<br />
clipper on the previous day of the experiment. The oral doses were given<br />
using a round tipped stainless steel needle attached to 1 ml syringe.<br />
Following an overnight fast, rats were divided into 4 groups (n=5) and<br />
treated as follows:<br />
Group I (Control) – 1ml gum acacia suspension was given orally.<br />
Group II - 25 mg/kg Glz in mucilage of gum acacia was given orally<br />
(Stetinova et al., 2007).<br />
Group III –1 gm water soluble ointment base containing 25 mg of the<br />
Glz was applied on 4cm 2 of the skin. Many trials on rats were done to<br />
find a suitable topical formula. The dose of 25 mg drug was selected by<br />
conducting a series of experiments with graded doses ranging between 10<br />
to 50 mg. The application site was covered with a non-occlusive dressing<br />
and wrapped with a semi-occlusive bandage.<br />
Group IV –1 gm water soluble ointment base containing certain amount<br />
of Glz - PEG 6000 solid dispersion (10:90) equivalent to 25 mg Glz was<br />
applied on 4cm 2 of the skin.<br />
Blood samples were collected in eppendorf predose (0 hr) and 2, 4, 6, 8<br />
and 24 hours post dose from the orbital sinuses; the serum glucose<br />
concentrations were assayed based on the standard glucose oxidase<br />
39
method (El-Sayed et al., 1989) using a commercial kit according to the<br />
supplied instructions as follows:<br />
Principle:<br />
reaction:<br />
Glucose present in the sample is determined according the following<br />
Glucose + O2 + H2O2 glucose oxidase enzyme gluconic acid + H2O2<br />
------------------><br />
2 H2O2 + phenol amino-4-antipyrine peroxidase enzyme quinoneimine+4<br />
H2O<br />
Sample preparation:<br />
-----------------><br />
The collected blood samples were left for 15 min in the refrigerator,<br />
then the serum was separated using a centrifuge operating at 4000 rpm for<br />
20 min, then the serum was taken by a syringe in a test tube.<br />
Procedure of measurement:<br />
The amounts of samples and standard used are summarized in (Table 14).<br />
Table 14: Amounts of sample and standard used.<br />
Blank Standard Sample<br />
Reagent 1.0 ml 1.0 ml 1.0 ml<br />
Standard<br />
reagent<br />
(100mg<br />
glu/dl)<br />
------- -------<br />
Sample ------- ------- <br />
40
Samples and reagent were mixed and incubated for 10 min at 37°C.<br />
The absorbance of sample (Asample) and standard (Astandard) against reagent<br />
blank were measured. The intensity of the developed pink colour was<br />
measured spectrometrically at 500 nm against a blank solution.<br />
Calculation:<br />
(Asample)<br />
Glucose concentration (mg/dl) = ----------- x 100<br />
(Astandard)<br />
4.9.3. Anti-diabetic activity in diabetic rats:<br />
4.9.3.1. Induction of diabetes mellitus:<br />
The overnight fasted rats were made diabetic by a single<br />
intraperitoneal injection of streptozotocin (STZ) (50 mg/kg; i.p) dissolved<br />
in citrate buffer (pH 4.5). The blood glucose was measured after 24 hrs<br />
and animals with blood glucose levels >250 mg/dL were selected<br />
(Sridevi et al., 2000).<br />
4.9.3.2. Anti-diabetic activity in diabetic rats:<br />
The anti diabetic activity of the prepared topical preparation was<br />
evaluated in overnight fasted diabetic rats.<br />
Diabetic rats were divided into 3 groups (n=5). The rats were treated as<br />
following:<br />
Group I (Control) – 1ml gum acacia suspension was given orally.<br />
Group II - Glz 25 mg/kg was given orally (Stetinova et al.,2007).<br />
Group III –1 gm water soluble ointment base containing certain amount<br />
of Glz - PEG 6000 solid dispersion (10:90) equivalent to 25 mg Glz was<br />
applied on 4cm 2 of the skin.<br />
41
At time intervals between 2-24 h after treatment, blood was collected<br />
from orbital sinuses; blood glucose levels were determined using the<br />
glucometer.<br />
The results obtained from the measurement of blood glucose level by<br />
both glucometer and standard glucose oxidase method were nearly the<br />
same.<br />
4.9.4. Statistical analysis:<br />
The obtained data were compared statistically using One-way<br />
analysis of variance (ANOVA) test of significance on a computer<br />
statistical SPSS analysis program. A p-value of 0.05 or less was<br />
considered to be significant (Suwanpidokkul et al., 2004).<br />
42
1. Partition coefficient of Glz:<br />
Results and Discussion<br />
In the present study, the partition coefficient of Glz was found<br />
to be 1.79 (log octanol/ water =0.25).<br />
2. In vitro release of Glz from different topical formulations:<br />
Glz was chosen to be formulated in topical bases, to demonstrate its<br />
expected action from different topical preparations, such as an ointment,<br />
cream and gel. It is important that the vehicle is able to release the active<br />
ingredient which it carries. Selection of different topical bases as vehicle<br />
for Glz depends on several factors such as polarity, viscosity, and<br />
homogeneity. For this purpose traditional classes of topical bases were<br />
investigated which include water soluble bases, emulsion bases,<br />
absorption bases and gel bases. The emulsion bases included O/W<br />
emulsion and W/O emulsion.<br />
The partition coefficient of the drug is considered as one of the<br />
important parameters for the estimation of the interaction of that drug<br />
with the vehicle and the receiving medium (Celebi et al., 1993).<br />
As general rule in ointment formulations is that, if the drug is held<br />
firmly by the vehicle the rate of the release of the drug is slow (Barr,<br />
1962)<br />
The release of the drug from ointments can be altered by modifying<br />
the composition of the vehicle (Idson, 1983). A greater release of the<br />
drug is expected when there is less affinity of the drug for the base.<br />
(Table 15) and (Figure 34) showed the release of Glz from different<br />
topical bases.<br />
From the data obtained it is clear that the percentage amount of drug<br />
released from water soluble base and gel base are greater than that<br />
released<br />
43
Table 15: In vitro release data of Glz from different topical<br />
Time (min)<br />
bases.<br />
Glz released % ± (sd)<br />
WSB HPMC gel O/W cream<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0 ± 0<br />
60<br />
44<br />
1.35 ± 0.12 0 ± 0<br />
5.70± 0.43 6.71 ± 0.70 0 ± 0<br />
90 14.90 ± 0 11.97 ± 0.74 1.70 ± 0.3<br />
120 22.15 ±0.38 16.80 ± 0.6 2.44 ± 0.3<br />
150 30.46± 0.37 21.41 ± 0.9 2.71 ± 0.4<br />
180 35.4 ± 0.41 25.79 ± 0.57 4.08 ± 0.021<br />
240 47.61± 0.39<br />
300 56.55± 0.07<br />
31.21 ± 0.48 4.90 ± 0.56<br />
37.86 ± 0.9 6.7 ± 0.9<br />
360 62.10 ± 0.42 43.38 ± 2.2 8.43 ± 0.38
WSB HPMC gel O/W cream<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Released<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 34: In vitro release profile of gliclazide from different topical preparation.<br />
45
from other bases. The rate of drug release can be arranged in the<br />
following descending order:<br />
Water soluble base (62.1 %) > HPMC gel (43.38 %) > O/W emulsion<br />
base (8.43 %).<br />
There was no drug release from the absorption base. This may be<br />
attributed to composition of the absorption base which contains white soft<br />
paraffin with several additional lipoidal constituents which favor the<br />
retention of the drug in the base ( Furia, 1972).<br />
Also, there was no drug release from W/O emulsion base. This<br />
finding can be explained on the bases that in case of W/O emulsion bases,<br />
the presence of an oily vehicle as an external phase will result in<br />
formation of an occlusive film on the membrane surface, which will<br />
result in retardation of the permeation of the drug molecules across the<br />
membrane, into the sink solution (Ismail et al., 1990; Khitworth and<br />
Stephenson, 1976).<br />
On the other hand, the higher release of Glz from O/W emulsion<br />
base than from W/O emulsion base may be due to the formation of a<br />
continuous contact between the external phase of the O/W emulsion and<br />
the buffer (Nakano et al., 1971), however, the lower release of the drug<br />
from O/W emulsion base than from water soluble base and HPMC base<br />
may be due to the greater solubility of the drug in the internal oily phase<br />
which may cause a decrease in the rate of release of the drug.<br />
Due to the high lipid solubility of Glz, this may explain the slow<br />
release of the drug that is observed from these bases.<br />
The high diffusion rate of Glz from water soluble base that contains<br />
mainly polyethylene glycol may be due to diffusion of the buffer solution<br />
through the cellophane membrane and formation of water-PEG solution<br />
which increase the solubility and accordingly the rate and extent of Glz<br />
release.<br />
46
The high release of the Glz from HPMC gel is considered to be due<br />
to a high miscibility of this base with the release medium.<br />
3. Viscosity determination:<br />
As shown in (Table 16), water soluble base showed the highest<br />
viscosity followed by O/W cream and finally HPMC gel. It is noted that<br />
all bases included (8:92) PEG 4000 SD have higher viscosity than that<br />
included (1:10) glu SD.<br />
Table 16: Viscosity of different topical bases.<br />
Preparation Viscosity (poise)<br />
(8:92) PEG 4000 SD (1:10) glu SD<br />
WSB .9 2271.4<br />
O/W cream 2251.07 2071.02<br />
HPMC gel 985.90 816.90<br />
4. Effect of incorporation of solid dispersions in different topical<br />
preparations:<br />
(Tables 17-20) and (Figures 35-38) showed that all solid<br />
dispersions increased the overall Glz diffusion by increasing the amount<br />
of diffusible species in the donor phase by enhancing drug solubility.<br />
Therefore, Glz solid dispersions increased the Glz concentration gradient<br />
over the membrane, which resulted in increase in Glz diffusion (Mario et<br />
al., 2005). Incorporation of clotrimazole solid dispersion in O/W cream<br />
improved the antifungal activity of clotrimazol (Madhusudhan et al.,<br />
1999). It was found that formulations containing Rifampicin in the form<br />
of solid dispersion with PEG have shown the best release characteristics<br />
of the antibiotic from oleaginous bases containing Tween 80 (Youssef, et<br />
47
al., 1988). In this study PEG 6000 solid dispersion (8:92) drug to carrier<br />
ratio had the most influential effect on the rate and the extent of release of<br />
Glz , followed by glucose solid dispersion (1:10), PEG 4000 solid<br />
dispersion (8:92) and finally urea solid dispersion (1:10). This is in<br />
agreement with the dissolution results with exception that the dissolution<br />
efficiency of (8:92) PEG 4000 SD (42.23% ± 0.28) was greater than that<br />
of glucose solid dispersion (37.05 ± 0.87) and this may be due to the<br />
higher viscosity of topical bases containing PEG 4000 solid dispersion<br />
than that containing glucose solid dispersion as shown in Table 16. All<br />
data are summarized in Figure 39.<br />
48
Table 17: In vitro release of gliclazide and (8:92) gliclazide-PEG 6000 solid dispersion from different topical<br />
bases.<br />
Gliclazide released % ± (sd)<br />
O/W cream<br />
O/W cream<br />
HPMC gel<br />
HPMC gel<br />
WSB<br />
Time (min) WSB<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide±)<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide)<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide)<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0 ± 0 3.03 ± 0.4 1.35 ± 0.12 6.70 ± 0.28 0 ± 0 1.90 ± 0<br />
60 5.70± 0.43 11.45 ± 1 6.71 ± 0.70 13.02 ± 0.35 0 ± 0 3.30 ± 0<br />
90 14.90 ± 0 19.75 ± 0.4 11.97 ± 0.74 19.48 ± 0.05 1.70 ± 0.3 4.35 ± 0.4<br />
120 22.15 ±0.38 27.30 ± 0.28 16.80 ± 0.6 25.41 ± 0.21 2.44 ± 0.3 7.16 ± 0.48<br />
150 30.46± 0.37 34.22 ± 0.11 21.41 ± 0.9 31.16 ± 0.98 2.71 ± 0.4 8.38 ± 0.44<br />
180 35.4 ± 0.41 39.20 ± 0.24 25.79 ± 0.57 39.62± 0.84 4.08 ± 0.021 8.80 ± 0.59<br />
240 47.61± 0.39 51.50 ± 1.4 31.21 ± 0.48 44.47 ± 1.2 4.90 ± 0.56 10.37 ± 0.63<br />
300 56.55± 0.07 60.90 ± 1.6 37.86 ± 0.9 51.47 ± 1.5 6.7 ± 0.9 14.4 ± 0.62<br />
360 62.10 ± 0.42 69.96 ± 2.5 43.38 ± 2.2 60.47 ± 1.5 8.43 ± 0.38 16.80 ± 0.37<br />
% Increase ------- 11.23 ------- 28.26 ------- 99.28<br />
49
WSB- glic WSB-SD HPMC gel-glic<br />
HPMC gel- SD O/W cream-glic O/W cream- SD<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Released<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 35: In vitro release profile of gliclazide and (8:92) gliclazide –PEG 6000 solid dispersion from<br />
different topical bases.<br />
50
Table 18: In vitro release of gliclazide and (1:10) gliclazide-glucose solid dispersion from different topical<br />
Gliclazide released % ± (sd)<br />
O/W cream<br />
O/W cream<br />
HPMC gel<br />
HPMC gel<br />
WSB<br />
Time (min) WSB<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide±)<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide)<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide)<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0 ± 0 1.14 ± 0.1 1.35 ± 0.12 6.3 ± 0.28 0 ± 0 1.60± 0.24<br />
60 5.70± 0.43 9.68 ± 0.7 6.71 ± 0.70 12.4 ± 0.35 0 ± 0 2.06 ± 0.4<br />
90 14.90 ± 0 17.88 ± 0.97 11.97 ± 0.74 18.72 ± 0.05 1.70 ± 0.3 3.16 ± 0.7<br />
120 22.15 ±0.38 25.96 ± 0.8 16.80 ± 0.6 21.90 ± 0.20 2.44 ± 0.3 5.8 ± 0.7<br />
150 30.46± 0.37 33.43 ± 1.2 21.41 ± 0.9 27.47 ± 0.98 2.71 ± 0.4 7.4 ± 1.1<br />
180 35.4 ± 0.41 37.90 ± 1.5 25.79 ± 0.57 34.04± 0.84 4.08 ± 0.021 8.65 ± 0.7<br />
240 47.61± 0.39 48.73 ± 1.5 31.21 ± 0.48 39.24 ± 1.2 4.90 ± 0.56 9.1± 0.37<br />
300 56.55± 0.07 58.5± 0.96 37.86 ± 0.9 45.89 ± 1.5 6.7 ± 0.9 12.12 ± 0.9<br />
360 62.10 ± 0.42 67.22 ± 1.1 43.38 ± 2.2 55.69 ± 1.5 8.43 ± 0.38 14.77 ± 1.0<br />
% Increase ------ 7.61 ----- 22.1 ----- 42.92<br />
51
WSB-glic WSB-SD HPMC gel- glic<br />
HPMC gel-SD O/W cream- glic O/W cream- SD<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Released<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 36: In vitro release profile of gliclazide and (1:10) gliclazide –glucose solid dispersion from different topical<br />
bases.<br />
52
Table 19: In vitro release of gliclazide and (8:92) gliclazide-PEG 4000 solid dispersion from different topical<br />
bases.<br />
Gliclazide released % ± (sd)<br />
O/W cream<br />
O/W cream<br />
HPMC gel<br />
HPMC gel<br />
WSB<br />
Time (min) WSB<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide±)<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide)<br />
(SD)<br />
(gliclazide)<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0 ± 0 1.4 ± 0.17 1.35 ± 0.12 2.55 ± 0 0 ± 0 1.20± 0.2<br />
60 5.70± 0.43 8.15 ± 0.21 6.71 ± 0.70 8.98 ± 0.12 0 ± 0 1.64 ± 0.13<br />
90 14.90 ± 0 18.40 ± 0.9 11.97 ± 0.74 18.06 ± 0.35 1.70 ± 0.3 2.42 ± 0.22<br />
120 22.15 ±0.38 24.71 ± 0.7 16.80 ± 0.6 23.95 ± 0.43 2.44 ± 0.3 2.84 ± 0.2<br />
150 30.46± 0.37 32.71 ± 1.2 21.41 ± 0.9 27.7 ± 0.43 2.71 ± 0.4 4.44 ± 0.5<br />
180 35.4 ± 0.41 38.26 ± 0.08 25.79 ± 0.57 33.6± 0.58 4.08 ± 0.021 5.5 ± 0.35<br />
240 47.61± 0.39 48.48 ± 1.02 31.21 ± 0.48 38.1 ± 1.9 4.90 ± 0.56 8.16± 0.57<br />
300 56.55± 0.07 58.89 ± 1.5 37.86 ± 0.9 44.7 ± 1.6 6.7 ± 0.9 10.99 ± 1.03<br />
360 62.10 ± 0.42 65.1 ± 1.8 43.38 ± 2.2 53.7 ± 1.9 8.43 ± 0.38 11.71 ± 0.1<br />
% Increase -------- 4.60 ------- 19.21 ----- 28.01<br />
53
WSB- glic WSB-SD HPMC gel- glic<br />
HPMC gel- SD O/W cream-glic O/W cream-SD<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Released<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 37: In<br />
vitro release profile of gliclazide and (8:92) gliclazide –PEG 4000 solid dispersion from<br />
different topical bases.<br />
54
Table 20: In vitro release of gliclazide and (1:10) gliclazide-urea solid dispersion from different topica<br />
bases.<br />
Gliclazide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min) WSB WSB HPMC gel HPMC gel O/W cream O/W cream<br />
(gliclazide) (SD) (gliclazide) (SD) (gliclazide±) (SD)<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0 ± 0 1.54 ± 0.13 1.35 ± 0.12 3.92 ± 0.18 0 ± 0 0± 0<br />
60 5.70± 0.43 8.07 ± 0.47 6.71 ± 0.70 10.30 ± 0.30 0 ± 0 0.99 ± 0<br />
90 14.90 ± 0 16.98 ± 0.37 11.97 ± 0.74 15.50 ± 0.27 1.70 ± 0.3 2.28± 0.59<br />
120 22.15 ±0.38 24.37 ± 0.48 16.80 ± 0.6 21.05 ± 0.07 2.44 ± 0.3 3.44 ± 0.63<br />
150 30.46± 0.37 31.14 ± 0.18 21.41 ± 0.9 25.1 ± 0.56 2.71 ± 0.4 4.21 ± 0.44<br />
180 35.4 ± 0.41 37.6± 1.8 25.79 ± 0.57 29.94± 0.06 4.08 ± 0.021 5.89 ± 0.62<br />
240 47.61± 0.39 47.25 ± 1.1 31.21 ± 0.48 35.15 ± 0.49 4.90 ± 0.56 7.20± 0.48<br />
300 56.55± 0.07 57.37± 1.03 37.86 ± 0.9 41.80 ± 0.71 6.7 ± 0.9 8.80 ± 0.37<br />
360 62.10 ± 0.42 64.15 ± 1.4 43.38 ± 2.2 52.41 ± 1.1 8.43 ± 0.38 10.74 ± 0.4<br />
% Increase ------ 3.19 ------- 17.22 ------- 21.5<br />
55
WSB- glic WSB- SD HPMC gel -glic<br />
HPMC gel - SD O/W cream- glic O/W cream -SD<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
% Released<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure<br />
38: In vitro release profile of gliclazide and (1:10) gliclazide –urea solid dispersion from different topical bases.<br />
56
57<br />
1 W<br />
2 HPMC<br />
3 O/W cr
80<br />
PEG 6000<br />
glucose<br />
PEG 4000<br />
70<br />
urea<br />
PEG 6000<br />
glucose<br />
PEG 4000<br />
Drug<br />
60<br />
urea<br />
Drug alone<br />
(8:92) PEG 6000 SD<br />
(1:10) glucose SD<br />
(8:92) PEG 4000 SD<br />
(1:10) urea SD<br />
50<br />
Drug<br />
40<br />
% Released<br />
30<br />
PEG 6000<br />
glucose<br />
PEG 4000<br />
20<br />
urea<br />
Drug<br />
10<br />
0<br />
1 2 3<br />
Topical bases<br />
Figure 39: Release of gliclazide from different bases with different solid dispersions.<br />
58
5. Kinetic analysis of release data:<br />
As shown in (Table 21) the data of Glz and solid dispersions<br />
released from different topical formulations followed first order kinetics<br />
while that obtained from HPMC gel followed diffusion controlled<br />
mechanism or Higuchi model.<br />
Table 21: Kinetic data of the release of Glz and solid<br />
WSB<br />
HPMC gel<br />
O/W cream<br />
dispersions from different topical bases.<br />
Topical<br />
Correlation coefficient (R) Observed<br />
preparation Zero First Diffusion order<br />
Drug 0.9883 0.9987 0.9965 First<br />
(8:92) Glz- PEG<br />
6000 SD<br />
0.9933 0.9984 0.9982 First<br />
(8:92) Glz- PEG<br />
4000 SD<br />
0.9889 0.9993 0.9981 First<br />
(1:10) Glz-glu SD 0.9912 0.9990 0.9987 First<br />
(1:10) Glz-UR<br />
SD<br />
0.9906 0.9996 0.9980 First<br />
Drug 0.9908 0.9981 0.9987 D.M<br />
(8:92) Glz- PEG<br />
6000 SD<br />
0.9884 0.9959 0.9963 D.M<br />
(8:92) Glz- PEG<br />
4000 SD<br />
0.9904 0.9959 0.9967 D.M<br />
(1:10) Glz-glu SD 0.9863 0.9949 0.9965 D.M<br />
(1:10) Glz-UR<br />
SD<br />
0.9930 0.9941 0.9945 D.M<br />
Drug 0.9931 0.9933 0.9810 First<br />
(8:92) Glz- PEG<br />
6000 SD<br />
0.9912 0.9915 0.9837 First<br />
(8:92) Glz- PEG<br />
4000 SD<br />
0.9897 0.9899 0.9654 First<br />
(1:10) Glz-glu SD 0.9857 0.9870 0.9815 First<br />
(1:10) Glz-UR<br />
SD<br />
0.9957 0.9967 0.9935 First<br />
59
6. In vitro permeation of Glz through abdominal rabbit skin:<br />
Skin permeation studies indicated that Glz permeation through<br />
hairless rabbit skin was negligible. The possible reasons for this result<br />
may be i) Glz , a lipophilic drug, was retained within the stratum corneum<br />
with no partioning into the viable epidermis or ii) most of the drug was<br />
used up to saturate the binding sites in the skin and the remaining drug<br />
was probably insufficient to provide a significant concentration gradient<br />
(Srini et al., 1998).<br />
7. In vivo study:<br />
The result of hypoglycemic activity of the topically applied<br />
gliclazide and oral gliclazide (25 mg/kg; p.o.) in both normal and diabetic<br />
rats are shown in (Table 22-23) and (Figure 40-41).<br />
*** Studies in normal rats<br />
Gliclazide (oral) produced a significant decrease of 60.64 % ± 6.3<br />
(plevels at 2 hr and then the<br />
blood glucose levels decreased. The percentage reduction in the blood<br />
glucose levels at the end of 24 hr were only 24.83 ± 2.05. On other hand,<br />
the blood glucose reducing response of gliclazide (topical) was gradual<br />
and significant upto 24 h compared to control (p <br />
blood glucose reducing response was observed after 6 hr and thereafter<br />
remained stable up to 24 h. These results are in accordance with the<br />
results obtained by (Mutalik and Udupa, 2005).<br />
As shown in (Figure 40), the blood glucose reducing activity of<br />
ointment contained (10:90) gliclazide –PEG 6000 solid dispersions was<br />
significantly more when compared to ointment contained gliclazide alone.<br />
This is in agreement with the results of Madhusudhan et al., 1999 who<br />
60
found that Incorporation of clotrimazole solid dispersion in O/W cream<br />
improved the antifungal activity of clotrimazol.<br />
Topical route effectively maintained normoglycemic level in<br />
contrast to the oral group which produced remarkable hypoglycemia.<br />
61
Table 22 : Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and topical application of gliclazide and 10:90 gliclazide- PEG<br />
6000 solid dispersion in normal rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
(Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels)<br />
Absolute<br />
blood glucose<br />
level (mg/dl)<br />
Group<br />
2hr 4hr 6hr 8hr 24hr<br />
73.36 ± 9.89<br />
(16.6 ± 2.09)<br />
75.06 ± 8.4<br />
(15.46 ±2.45)<br />
76.1 ± 9.2<br />
(13.44 ±1.44)<br />
76.45 ± 5.2<br />
(12.04 ± 0.99)<br />
88.72 ± 8.6 82.33 ± 7.7*<br />
(7.14±1.25)**<br />
Control<br />
(1ml gum acacia<br />
suspension)<br />
67.66 ± 4.1<br />
(24.83 ±2.05)<br />
48.5 ± 6.2<br />
(46.89 ±4.93)<br />
43.3 ± 4.64<br />
(51.85 ± 3.5)<br />
39.97 ± 5.3<br />
(55.99 ±4.41)<br />
89.85 ± 5.01 35.27 ± 6.07<br />
(60.64 ± 6.3)<br />
Oral gliclazide<br />
(25mg/kg)<br />
56.29 ± 1.4<br />
(32.71 ± 6.9)<br />
52.18 ± 3.8<br />
(34.34 ± 4.8)<br />
47.92 ± 5.1<br />
(40.05 ± 5.4)<br />
58.4 ± 2.2<br />
(30.14 ± 5.9)<br />
81.59 ± 8.9 58.22 ± 4.6<br />
(28.19 ± 4.5)<br />
WSB<br />
(Gliclazide)<br />
51.13 ± 3.5<br />
(37.45 ± 3.6)<br />
45.38 ± 3.5<br />
(44.66 ±4.51)<br />
38.46 ± 4.6<br />
(52.62 ± 6.7)<br />
47.05 ± 2.26<br />
(43.5 ± 3.05)<br />
82.14 ± 3.8 62.00 ± 3.2<br />
(25.5 ± 4.03)<br />
WSB<br />
(10:90 gliclazide-<br />
PEG 6000 SD)<br />
* Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl). ** Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels.<br />
62
80<br />
Control oral gliclazide WSB ( gliclazide) WSB (gliclazide-PEG 6000 SD)<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
30<br />
20<br />
% Reduction in blood glucose level(mg/dl)<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26<br />
Time (hr)<br />
Figure 40: Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral and topical administration of gliclazide in normal rats.<br />
63
*** Studies in diabetic rats:<br />
Results obtained from the diabetic rats after application of ointment<br />
base containing certain amount of Glz - PEG 6000 solid dispersion<br />
(10:90) equivalent to 25 mg Glz and oral gliclazide administration are<br />
shown in (Figure 41) and (Table 23).<br />
Oral and topical groups showed significant hypoglycemic activity up<br />
to 24 h (p <br />
effect produced by the topical gliclazide was significantly less when<br />
compared to oral administration. The topical and the oral drug produced a<br />
decrease of 36.35 % ± 4.42 and 21.33 % ± 3.73 respectively, in the blood<br />
glucose level after 24 h.<br />
Studies in diabetic rats showed small difference in the duration of<br />
action between the oral and topical groups and this may be due to reduced<br />
insulin level in diabetic models which impairs the principal metabolic<br />
pathways of sulphonylurea which resulted in its prolonged action in<br />
orally treated group (Strove and Belkina, 1989).<br />
These results are in accordance with the results obtained by Sridevi<br />
et al., 2000 who stated that the hypoglycemic activity of oral and topical<br />
groups did not differ significantly in the two groups after 8 hrs. The<br />
TDDS and the oral drug produced decrease of 61.9 ± 9.5% and 63.4 ±<br />
3.3% respectively, in the blood glucose levels after 24 hrs.<br />
Finally, the slow and sustained release of the drug from the<br />
transdermal system might reduce manifestations like severe<br />
hypoglycemia, sulphonylurea receptor down regulation and the risk of<br />
chronic hyperinsulinemia (Faber et al., 1990 and Bitzen et al., 1992).<br />
64
Table 23 : Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and topical application of gliclazide and 10:90 gliclazide- PEG<br />
6000 solid dispersion in diabetic rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
.<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
(Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels)<br />
Absolute<br />
blood glucose<br />
level (mg/dl)<br />
Group<br />
2hr 4hr 6hr 8hr 24hr<br />
223.4 ± 40.8<br />
(5.22 ± 2.74)<br />
224.4 ± 38.8<br />
(4.76±0.89)<br />
230.6 ± 40.8<br />
(2.16 ±1.68)<br />
232.2 ± 38.46<br />
(1.35 ± 1.06)<br />
235.6 ± 40.3 228.4± 36.26*<br />
(2.89±1.65)**<br />
Control<br />
(1ml gum acacia<br />
suspension)<br />
365.6 ± 13.63<br />
(36.35 ±4.42)<br />
316.6 ± 32.5<br />
(44.84 ±7.03)<br />
293.8 ± 43.11<br />
(48.88 ± 4.9)<br />
327.2 ± 41.5<br />
(43.18 ±6.8)<br />
577 ± 48.16 355.1 ± 55.32<br />
(38.28 ± 5.57)<br />
Oral gliclazide<br />
(25mg/kg)<br />
254 ± 27.21<br />
(21.33 ± 3.73)<br />
263.2 ± 34.98<br />
(18.69 ±3.08)<br />
284.2 ± 37.7<br />
(12.53± 1.47)<br />
293 ± 43.73<br />
(9.7 ± 1.14)<br />
324.6 ± 47 302.4 ± 44.89<br />
(6.78 ± 2.2)<br />
WSB<br />
(10:90 gliclazide-<br />
PEG 6000 SD)<br />
* Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl). ** Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels.<br />
65
Control Oral Glz Topical Glz<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
% Reduction in the blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
0<br />
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26<br />
Time (hr)<br />
Figure 41: Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral and topical administration of gliclazide in diabetic<br />
rats.<br />
66
Conclusion:<br />
From the previously demonstrated data the following results can be<br />
concluded:<br />
1- Glz has a lipophilic property.<br />
2- The amount of Glz released from water soluble base (PEG base) and<br />
HPMC gel base was found to be higher than that from other bases.<br />
3- The amount of Glz released from O/W emulsion base was greater than<br />
that released from W/O emulsion base.<br />
4- No drug is released from the absorption base and W/O emulsion base.<br />
5- The investigation showed the effect of incorporation of Glz solid<br />
dispersions in different carriers such as PEG 4000, PEG 6000, glucose<br />
and urea on the amount of Glz released from different topical bases<br />
which can be summarized as follows in descending order:<br />
(8:92) Glz-PEG 6000 SD > (1:10) Glz-glu SD > (8:92) Glz – PEG<br />
4000 SD > Glz- UR SD.<br />
6- The present study showed that gliclazide was absorbed through the<br />
skin and lowered the blood glucose levels.<br />
Topical preparations of Glz or its solid dispersions exhibited better<br />
control of blood glucose level than oral Glz administration in rats as<br />
topical route effectively maintained normoglycemic level in contrast to<br />
the oral group which produced remarkable hypoglycemia.<br />
The blood glucose reducing activity of ointment contained (10:90)<br />
gliclazide –PEG 6000 solid dispersions was significantly more when<br />
compared to ointment contained gliclazide alone.<br />
Finally, the slow and sustained release of the drug from the<br />
transdermal system might reduce manifestations like severe<br />
hypoglycemia, sulphonylurea receptor down regulation and the risk of<br />
chronic hyperinsulinemia.<br />
67
1. Description<br />
Introduction<br />
Glibenclamide<br />
1.1 Name, formula, molecular weight<br />
Glib is 1-{4-[2-(5-chloro-2-methoxybenzamido) ethyl]<br />
benzenesulphonyl}-3-cyclohexylurea<br />
Figure 43: Glib structure.<br />
C23 H28 Cl N3 O5 S<br />
Molecular Weight = 494.0<br />
1.2 Appearance, odour, colour:<br />
Glib is a white, crystalline, odourless powder and practically without<br />
taste (Pamela, 1981).<br />
2. Physical properties<br />
2.1 Melting point<br />
172° to 174°<br />
2.2 Solubility<br />
Glib is virtually insoluble in water and ether; soluble in 330 parts of<br />
alcohol, in 36 parts of chloroform, and in 250 parts of methanol (Pamela,<br />
1981).<br />
69
3.Pharmacokinetics:<br />
Glib is readily absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract, peak plasma<br />
concentrations usually occurring within 2 to 4 hours, and is extensively<br />
bound to plasma proteins. Absorption may be slower in hyperglycaemic<br />
patients and may differ according to the particle size of the preparation<br />
used. It is metabolised, almost completely, in the liver, the principal<br />
metabolite being only very weakly active. About 50% of a dose is<br />
excreted in the urine and 50% via the bile into the faeces (Martindale,<br />
1996) .<br />
4.Mode of action:<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
5. Uses and Administration:<br />
Glib is a sulfonylurea antidiabetic. It is given by mouth in the<br />
treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus and has a duration of action of up to<br />
24 hours.<br />
The usual initial dose of conventional formulations in type 2<br />
diabetes mellitus is 2.5 to 5 mg daily with breakfast, adjusted every 7<br />
days by increments of 2.5 or 5 mg daily up to 15 mg daily. Although<br />
increasing the dose above 15 mg is unlikely to produce further benefit,<br />
doses of up to 20 mg daily have been given. Doses greater than 10 mg<br />
daily may be given in 2 divided doses. Because of the relatively long<br />
duration of action of Glib, it is best avoided in the elderly (Martindale,<br />
1996) .<br />
70
6. Precautions:<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
7. Adverse Effects:<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
8. Interactions:<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
9. Adverse Effects and Precautions<br />
As mentioned before under sulfonylureas.<br />
10. Methods of analysis:<br />
10.1. Polarography:<br />
Procedures have been described for quantitative work, an automated<br />
system, having a flow through micro cell used with silver- silver chloride<br />
reference electrode, has been stated to give good reproducibility (Pamela,<br />
1981).<br />
10.2. Non-aqueous titration:<br />
Tetramethylurea has been used as solvent for the titration of Glib<br />
with 0.1 normal lithium methoxide in benzene-methanol. The end point<br />
was determined potentiometrically or by using 0.2% azoviolet in toluene<br />
as visual indicator (Pamela, 1981).<br />
10.3. Chromatography:<br />
Several procedures have been proposed for the identification of Glib<br />
by thin-layer chromatography. Among the solvent systems described are<br />
butanol-methanol-chloroform-25% ammonia, propanol-cyclohexane and<br />
propanol-benzene-cyclohexane.<br />
71
High-perfprmance liquid chromatography has been recommended for<br />
quantitative determination of Glib in tablets. The column packing uesd<br />
was 1% ethylene propylene copolymer on DuPont Zipax, with 0.01 M<br />
sodium borate containing 27.5% v/v methanol as mobile phase.<br />
Testosterone serves as internal standard (Pamela, 1981).<br />
72
Introduction<br />
There is considerable interest in the skin as a site of drug application<br />
both for local and systemic effect. However, the skin, in particular the<br />
stratum corneum, poses a formidable barrier to drug penetration thereby<br />
limiting topical and transdermal bioavailability. Skin penetration<br />
enhancement techniques have been developed to improve bioavailability<br />
and increase the range of drugs for which topical and transdermal<br />
delivery is a viable option (Heather, 2005).<br />
Drug permeation across the stratum corneum obeys Fick’s first law<br />
(equation 1) where steady-state flux (J) is related to the diffusion<br />
coefficient (D) of the drug in the stratum corneum over a diffusional path<br />
length or membrane thickness (h), the partition coefficient (P) between<br />
the stratum corneum and the vehicle, and the applied drug concentration<br />
(C0) which is assumed to be constant:<br />
1)<br />
73<br />
dm/dt = J = D C0 P/ h<br />
(Equation<br />
Equation 1 aids in identifying the ideal parameters for drug diffusion<br />
across the skin. The influence of solubility and partition coefficient of a<br />
drug on diffusion across the stratum corneum has been extensively<br />
studied. Molecules showing intermediate partition coefficients (log P<br />
octanol/water of 1-3) have adequate solubility within the lipid domains of<br />
the stratum corneum to permit diffusion through this domain whilst still<br />
having sufficient hydrophilic nature to allow partitioning into the viable<br />
tissues of the epidermis. The maximum permeability measurement being<br />
attained at log P value 2.5, which is typical of these types of experiments.
Optimal permeability has been shown to be related to low molecular size<br />
(Potts and Guy, 1992) (ideally less than 500 Da (Bos and Meinardi,<br />
2000)) as this affects diffusion coefficient, and low melting point which is<br />
related to solubility. When a drug possesses these ideal characteristics (as<br />
in the case of nicotine and nitroglycerin), transdermal delivery is feasible.<br />
However, where a drug does not possess ideal physicochemical<br />
properties, manipulation of the drug or vehicle to enhance diffusion,<br />
becomes necessary. The approaches that have been investigated are<br />
summarised in (Figure 42) and discussed below.<br />
Figure 42: Techniques to optimize drug permeation across the skin.<br />
1. Penetration enhancement through optimization of drug and<br />
vehicle properties:<br />
1.1. Prodrugs and ion-pairs:<br />
74
The prodrug approach has been investigated to enhance dermal and<br />
transdermal delivery of drugs with unfavourable partition coefficients<br />
(Sloan, 1992; Sloan and Wasdo, 2003). The prodrug design strategy<br />
generally involves addition of a promoiety to increase partition<br />
coefficient and hence solubility and transport of the parent drug in the<br />
stratum corneum. Upon reaching the viable epidermis, esterases release<br />
the parent drug by hydrolysis thereby optimising solubility in the aqueous<br />
epidermis. The prodrug approach has been investigated for increasing<br />
skin permeability of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (Davaran et<br />
al., 2003; Thorsteinsson et al., 1999), naltrexone (Stinchcomb et al.,<br />
2002)<br />
Charged drug molecules do not readily partition into or permeate<br />
through human skin. Formation of lipophilic ionpairs has been<br />
investigated to increase stratum corneum penetration of charged species.<br />
This strategy involves adding an oppositely charged species to the<br />
charged drug, forming an ion-pair in which the charges are neutralised so<br />
that the complex can partition into and permeate through the stratum<br />
corneum. The ion-pair then dissociates in the aqueous viable epidermis<br />
releasing the parent charged drug which can diffuse within the epidermal<br />
and dermal tissues. (Megwa et al., 2000; Valenta et al., 2000).<br />
(Sarveiya et al., 2004) recently reported a 16-fold increase in the steady-<br />
state flux of ibuprofen ionpairs across a lipophilic membrane.<br />
1.2. Chemical potential of drug in vehicle – saturated and<br />
supersaturated solutions:<br />
The maximum skin penetration rate is obtained when a drug is at its<br />
highest thermodynamic activity as is the case in a supersaturated solution.<br />
Supersaturated solutions can occur due to evaporation of solvent or by<br />
mixing of cosolvents. These systems are inherently unstable and require<br />
75
the incorporation of antinucleating agents to improve stability (Heather,<br />
2005).<br />
1.3. Eutectic Systems:<br />
As previously described, the melting point of drug influences<br />
solubility and hence skin penetration. According to regular solution<br />
theory, the lower the melting point, the greater the solubility of a material<br />
in a given solvent, including skin lipids. The melting point of a drug<br />
delivery system can be lowered by formation of a eutectic mixture: a<br />
mixture of two components which, at a certain ratio, inhibit the<br />
crystalline process of each other, such that the melting point of the two<br />
components in the mixture is less than that of each component alone.<br />
EMLA cream, a formulation consisting of a eutectic mixture of<br />
lignocaine and prilocaine applied under an occlusive film, provides<br />
effective local anaesthesia for pain-free venepuncture and other<br />
procedures (Ehrenstrom and Reiz, 1982).<br />
1.4. Complexes:<br />
Complexation of drugs with cyclodextrins has been used to enhance<br />
aqueous solubility and drug stability. Cyclodextrin has a hydrophilic<br />
exterior and lipophilic core in which appropriately sized organic<br />
molecules can form non-covalent inclusion complexes resulting in<br />
increased aqueous solubility and chemical stability (Loftsson and<br />
Brewster, 1996). As flux is proportional to the free drug concentration,<br />
where the cyclodextrin concentration is sufficient to complex only the<br />
drug which is in excess of its solubility, an increase in flux might be<br />
expected. However, at higher cyclodextrin concentrations, the excess<br />
76
cyclodextrin would be expected to complex free drug and hence reduce<br />
flux. Skin penetration enhancement has also been attributed to extraction<br />
of stratum corneum lipids by cyclodextrins (Bentley et al., 1997).<br />
1.5. Liposomes and Vesicles:<br />
A variety of encapsulating systems have been evaluated including<br />
liposomes, deformable liposomes or transfersomes, ethosomes and<br />
niosomes.<br />
Liposomes are colloidal particles formed as concentric biomolecular<br />
layers that are capable of encapsulating drugs. The skin delivery of<br />
triamcinolone acetonide was four to five times greater from a liposomal<br />
lotion than an ointment containing the same drug concentration (Mezei<br />
and Gulasekharam, 1980). The mechanism of enhanced drug uptake<br />
into the stratum corneum is unclear. It is possible that the liposomes<br />
either penetrate the stratum corneum to some extent then interact with the<br />
skin lipids to release their drug or that only their components enter the<br />
stratum corneum. It is interesting that the most effective liposomes are<br />
reported to be those composed of lipids similar to stratum corneum lipids<br />
(Egbaria et al., 1990), which are likely to most readily enter stratum<br />
corneum lipid lamellae and fuse with endogenous lipids.<br />
Transfersomes are vesicles composed of phospholipids as their<br />
main ingredient with 10-25% surfactant (such as sodium cholate) and 3-<br />
10% ethanol. The surfactant molecules act as “edge activators”,<br />
conferring ultradeformability on the transfersomes, which reportedly<br />
allows them to squeeze through channels in the stratum corneum that are<br />
less than one-tenth the diameter of the transfersome (Cevc, 1996).<br />
77
Ethosomes are liposomes with a high alcohol content capable of<br />
enhancing penetration to deep tissues and the systemic circulation (Biana<br />
and Touitou, 2003; Touitou et al., 2000).<br />
Niosomes are vesicles composed of nonionic surfactants that have<br />
been evaluated as carriers for a number of drug and cosmetic applications<br />
(Shahiwala and Misra, 2002; Sentjurc et al., 1999). This area continues<br />
to develop with further evaluation of current formulations and reports of<br />
other vesicle forming materials.<br />
1.6. Solid lipid Nanoparticles:<br />
Solid lipid nanoparticles (SLN) have recently been investigated as<br />
carriers for enhanced skin delivery of sunscreens, vitamins A and E,<br />
triptolide and glucocorticoids (Santos Maia et al., 2002; Mei et al.,<br />
2003). It is thought their enhanced skin penetration is primarily due to an<br />
increase in skin hydration caused by the occlusive film formed on the<br />
skin surface by the SLN.<br />
2. Penetration enhancement by stratum cornium modification:<br />
2.1. Hydration:<br />
Water is the most widely used and safest method to increase skin<br />
penetration of both hydrophilic (Behl et al., 1980) and lipophilic<br />
permeants (McKenzie and Stoughton, 1962). The water content of the<br />
stratum corneum is around 15 to 20% of the dry weight Additional water<br />
within the stratum corneum could alter permeant solubility and thereby<br />
modify partitioning from the vehicle into the membrane. In addition,<br />
increased skin hydration may swell and open the structure of the stratum<br />
corneum leading to an increase in penetration. Hydration can be increased<br />
by occlusion with plastic films; paraffins, oils, waxes as components of<br />
ointments and water-in-oil emulsions that prevent transepidermal water<br />
78
loss; and oil-in-water emulsions that donate water. A commercial<br />
example of this is the use of an occlusive dressing to enhance skin<br />
penetration of lignocaine and prilocane from EMLA cream in order to<br />
provide sufficient local anaesthesia within about 1 hour.<br />
2.2. Penetration enhancers:<br />
They are chemicals that interact with skin constituents to promote<br />
drug flux. To-date, a vast array of chemicals has been evaluated as<br />
penetration enhancers (or absorption promoters). Properties for<br />
penetration enhancers acting within skin have been given by Barry, 1983<br />
as follows:<br />
• They should be non-toxic, non-irritating and non-allergenic.<br />
• They would ideally work rapidly, and the activity and duration of effect<br />
should be both predictable and reproducible.<br />
• They should have no pharmacological activity within the body—i.e.<br />
should not bind to receptor sites.<br />
• The penetration enhancers should work unidirectionally, i.e. should<br />
allow therapeutic agents into the body whilst preventing the loss of<br />
endogenous material from the body.<br />
• When removed from the skin, barrier properties should return both<br />
rapidly and fully.<br />
• The penetration enhancers should be appropriate for formulation into<br />
diverse topical preparations, thus should be compatible with both<br />
excipients and drugs.<br />
• They should be cosmetically acceptable with an appropriate skin ‘feel’.<br />
79
2.2.1. Sulphoxides and similar chemicals:<br />
Dimethylsulphoxide (DMSO) is one of the earliest and most widely<br />
studied penetration enhancers. It is a powerful aprotic solvent which<br />
hydrogen bonds with itself rather than with water. it has been shown to<br />
promote the permeation of, for example, antiviral agents, steroids and<br />
antibiotics (Wiiliam and Barry, 2004).<br />
Although DMSO is an excellent accelerant it does create problems.<br />
The effects of the enhancer are concentration dependent and generally co-<br />
solvents containing >60% DMSO are needed for optimum enhancement<br />
efficacy. However, at these relatively high concentrations DMSO can<br />
cause erythema and wheals of the stratum corneum and may denature<br />
some proteins. Studies performed over 40 years ago on healthy volunteers<br />
painted with 90% DMSO twice daily for 3 weeks resulted in erythema,<br />
scaling, contact urticaria, stinging and burning sensations and several<br />
volunteers developed systemic symptoms (Kligman, 1965). A further<br />
problem with DMSO use as a penetration enhancer is the metabolite<br />
dimethylsulphide produced from the solvent; dimethylsulphide produces<br />
a foul odour on the breath.<br />
Since DMSO is problematic for use as a penetration enhancer,<br />
researchers have investigated similar, chemically related materials as<br />
accelerants. Dimethylacetamide (DMAC) and dimethylformamide (DMF)<br />
are similarly powerful aprotic solvents with structures akin to that of<br />
DMSO. Also in common with DMSO, both solvents have a broad range<br />
of penetration enhancing activities.<br />
The mechanisms of the sulphoxide penetration enhancers and<br />
DMSO in particular, are complex. DMSO is widely used to denature<br />
proteins and on application to human skin has been shown to change the<br />
intercellular keratin confirmation. DMSO has also been shown to interact<br />
80
with the intercellular lipid domains of human stratum corneum. Further,<br />
DMSO within skin membranes may facilitate drug partitioning from a<br />
formulation into this “universal solvent” within the tissue.<br />
2.2.2. Azone:<br />
Azone was the first molecule specifically designed as a skin<br />
penetration enhancer. The chemical has low irritancy, very low toxicity<br />
(oral LD50 in rat of 9 g/kg) and little pharmacological activity although<br />
some evidence exists for an antiviral effect. Thus, judging from the<br />
above, Azone appears to possess many of the desirable qualities listed for<br />
a penetration enhancer.<br />
Azone enhances the skin transport of a wide variety of drugs<br />
including steroids, antibiotics and antiviral agents. As with many<br />
penetration enhancers, the efficacy of azone appears strongly<br />
concentration dependent and is also influenced by the choice of vehicle<br />
from which it is applied. Surprisingly, Azone is most effective at low<br />
concentrations, being employed typically between 0.1% and 5%, often<br />
between 1% and 3%.<br />
Azone probably exerts its penetration enhancing effects through<br />
interactions with the lipid domains of the stratum corneum.<br />
Singh et al., 1993 reported that ephedrine patches containing azone<br />
showed an increased flux of ephedrine through rat skin and epidermis<br />
with a reduced time lag.<br />
2.2.3. Pyrrolidones:<br />
A range of pyrrolidones and structurally related compounds have<br />
been investigated as potential penetration enhancers in human skin. They<br />
apparently have greater effects on hydrophilic permeants than for<br />
lipophilic materials. N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) and 2-pyrrolidone<br />
(2P) are the most widely studied enhancers of this group.<br />
81
Pyrrolidones have been used as permeation promoters for numerous<br />
molecules including hydrophilic (e.g. mannitol, 5-fluorouracil and<br />
sulphaguanidine) and lipophilic (betamethasone-17-benzoate,<br />
hydrocortisone and progesterone) permeants. As with many studies,<br />
higher flux enhancements have been reported for the hydrophilic<br />
molecules. Recently NMP was employed with limited success as a<br />
penetration enhancer for captopril when formulated into a matrix type<br />
transdermal patch (Park et al., 2001).<br />
In terms of mechanisms of action, the pyrrolidones partition well<br />
into human corneum stratum. Within the tissue they may act by altering<br />
the solvent nature of the membrane and pyrrolidones have been used to<br />
generate ‘reservoirs’ within skin membranes. Such a reservoir effect<br />
offers potential for sustained release of a permeant from the stratum<br />
corneum over extended time periods (Wiiliam and Barry, 2004).<br />
2.2.4. Fatty acids:<br />
Percutaneous drug absorption has been increased by a wide variety<br />
of long chain fatty acids, the most popular of which is oleic acid. It<br />
appears that saturated alkyl chain lengths of around C10–C12 attached to a<br />
polar head group yields a potent enhancer. In contrast, for penetration<br />
enhancers containing unsaturated alkyl chains, then C18 appears near<br />
optimum. For such unsaturated compounds, the bent cis configuration is<br />
expected to disturb intercellular lipid packing more so than the trans<br />
arrangement, which differs little from the saturated analogue. Santoyo<br />
and Ygartua, employed the mono-unsaturated oleic acid, polyunsaturated,<br />
linoleic and linolenic acids and the saturated lauric acid enhancers for<br />
promoting piroxicam flux (Santoyo and Ygartua, 2000). As with Azone,<br />
oleic acid is effected at relatively low concentrations (typically less than<br />
10%) and can work synergistically when delivered from vehicles such as<br />
PG or ternary systems with dimethyl isosorbide (Aboofazeli et al., 2002)<br />
82
Considerable efforts have been directed at investigating the mechanisms<br />
of action of oleic acid as a penetration enhancer in human skin. It is clear<br />
from numerous literature reports that the enhancer interacts with and<br />
modifies the lipid domains of the stratum corneum, as would be expected<br />
for a long chain fatty acid with a cis configuration.<br />
2.2.5. Alcohols:<br />
Ethanol is the most commonly used alcohol as transdrmal<br />
penetration enhancer, it enhances permeation by extracting large amounts<br />
of stratum corneum lipids, it also increases the number of free sulphydryl<br />
groups of keratin in the stratum corneum proteins (Sinha and Maninder,<br />
2000). It increases permeation of ketoprofen from gel-spray formulation<br />
(Porzio et al., 1998).<br />
2.2.6. Propylene glycol (PG):<br />
PG is widely used alone or as cosolvent for other enhancers. PG<br />
increased the flux of heparin sodium (Bonina and Montenegro, 1992)<br />
and ketoprofen, but at higher concentration it inhibited the flux of<br />
ketoprofen. In combination with azone, PG increased the flux of<br />
methotrexate (Chatterjee et al., 1997), cyclosporine A (Duncan et al.,<br />
1990), and 5-fluouracil (Goodman and Berry, 1988). PG works by<br />
solvating keratin of stratum corneum , occupying hydrogen bonding sites<br />
and, thus reducing drug- tissue binding .<br />
2.2.7. Urea (UR):<br />
Urea is a hydrating agent (a hydrotrope) used in the treatment of<br />
scaling conditions such as psoriasis, ichthyosis and other hyper-keratotic<br />
skin conditions. Applied in a water in oil vehicle, urea alone or in<br />
combination with ammonium lactate produced significant stratum<br />
cornum hydration and improved barrier function when compared to the<br />
vehicle alone in human volunteers in vivo (Gloor et al., 2001). Urea also<br />
has keratolytic properties, usually when used in combination with<br />
83
salicylic acid for keratolysis. The somewhat modest penetration<br />
enhancing activity of urea probably results from a combination of<br />
increasing stratum cornum water content (water is a valuable penetration<br />
enhancer) and through the keratolytic activity.<br />
2.2.8. Surfactant:<br />
As with some of the materials described previously (for example<br />
ethanol and PG) surfactants are found in many existing therapeutic,<br />
cosmetic and agro-chemical preparations. Usually, surfactants are added<br />
to formulations in order to solubilise lipophilic active ingredients, and so<br />
they have potential to solubilise lipids within the stratum corneum.<br />
Typically composed of a lipophilic alkyl or aryl fatty chain, together with<br />
a hydrophilic head group, surfactants are often described in terms of the<br />
nature of the hydrophilic moiety. Anionic surfactants include sodium<br />
lauryl sulphate (SLS), cationic surfactants include cetyltrimethyl<br />
ammonium bromide, the nonoxynol surfactants are non-ionic surfactants<br />
and zwitterionic surfactants include dodecyl betaine. Anionic and cationic<br />
surfactants have potential to damage human skin; SLS is a powerful<br />
irritant and increased the trans epidemeral water loss in human volunteers<br />
in vivo (Tupker et al., 1990) and both anionic and cationic surfactants<br />
swell the stratum corneum and interact with intercellular keratin. Non-<br />
ionic surfactants tend to be widely regarded as safe. Surfactants generally<br />
have low chronic toxicity and most have been shown to enhance the flux<br />
of materials permeating through biological membranes.<br />
Surfactant facilitated permeation of many materials through skin<br />
membranes has been researched, with reports of significant enhancement<br />
of materials such as chloramphenicol through hairless mouse skin by<br />
SLS, and acceleration of hydrocortisone and lidocaine permeating across<br />
84
hairless mouse skin by the non-ionic surfactant Tween 80 (Sarpotdar<br />
and Zatz,1986a, 1986b).<br />
2.2.9. Gramicidin:<br />
Gramicidin is a linear peptide –type cataionic ionophore that has no<br />
charged or hydrophilic chains and its aqueous solubility is low.<br />
Gramicidin increased the flux of benzoic acid through rat abdominal skin<br />
by rearranging lipid barrier and increasing hydration of stratum corneum<br />
(Chi and Choi, 2000).<br />
2.2.10. Phospholipids:<br />
Phosphatidyl glycerol derivative increased the accumulation of<br />
bifonazole in skin and percutaneous penetration of tenoxicam;<br />
phosphatidyl choline derivatives promoted the percutaneous penetration<br />
of erythromycin (Yokomizo, 1996).<br />
2.2.11. Lipid synthesis inhibitors :<br />
The barrier layer consists of a mixture of cholesterol, free fatty<br />
acids, and ceramides, and these three classes of lipids are required for<br />
normal barrier function. Addition of inhibitors of lipid synthesis enhances<br />
the delivery of some drugs like lidocaine and caffeine .Fatty acid<br />
synthesis inhibitors like 5-(tetradecyloxy)-2-furancarboxilic acid (T<strong>OF</strong>A)<br />
and the cholesterol synthesis inhibitors like fluvastatin (FLU) or<br />
cholesterol sulfate (CS) delay the recovery of barrier damage produced by<br />
prior application of penetration enhancers like DMSO, acetone, and like<br />
causes a further boost in the transdermal permeation (Tsia et al., 1996).<br />
85
2.2.12. Amino acid derivatives :<br />
Various amino acid derivatives have been investigated for their<br />
potential in improving percutaneous permeation of drugs. Application of<br />
n-dodecyl-L-amino acid methyl ester and n-pentyl-N-acetyl prolinate on<br />
excised hairless mouse skin 1 hour prior to drug treatment produced<br />
greater penetration of hydrocortisone from its suspension (Fincher et al.,<br />
1996).<br />
2.2.13. Clofibric acid :<br />
Esters and amides of clofibric acid were studied for their<br />
permeation-enhancing property using nude mice skin. The best<br />
enhancement of hydrocortisone-21-acetate and betamethasone-17-<br />
valerate was observed with clofibric acid octyl amide when applied 1<br />
hour prior to each steroid. Amide analogues are generally more effective<br />
than ester derivatives of the same carbon chain length (Michniak et al.,<br />
1993).<br />
2.2.14. Dodecyl-N,N-dimethylamino acetate (DDAA):<br />
DDAA increasesd the transdermal permeation of a number of<br />
drugs,like propranolol HCl and timolol maleate.The permeability<br />
enhancing effect was due to changes in lipid structure of stratum corneum<br />
, like azone and oleic acid (Ruland et al ., 1994) and hydrating effect on<br />
the skin (Fleeker et al., 1989).Its duration of action is shorter than that of<br />
azone and dodecyl alcohol because of presence of hydrophilic groups<br />
(Hirvonen et al., 1994), so there is faster recovery of the skin structure<br />
and hence less irritation potential.<br />
2.2.15. Enzymes :<br />
86
Due to the importance of the phosphatidyl choline metabolism<br />
during maturation of the barrier lipids, the topical application of the<br />
phosphatidyl choline-depentent enzyme phospholipase c produced an<br />
increase in the transdermal flux of benzoic acid,mannitol, and<br />
testosterone . Triglycero hydrolase (TGH) increased the permeation of<br />
mannitol, while phospholipase A2 increased the flux of both benzoic acid<br />
and mannitol (Patil et al., 1996).<br />
87
1. Materials and supplies:<br />
Experiment and methodology<br />
* Glibenclamide was kindly supplied by Egyptian International<br />
Pharmaceutical Industries Company (EIPICO).<br />
* Sodium alginate (El-Gomhouria Company, Eygypt).<br />
* Tween 80 (Merk Sharp and Dohmn, Germany).<br />
* Cetrimide (Searle Company, England).<br />
* Transcutol, labrafil, oleic acid, linoleic acid, isopropylmyristate and<br />
isopropylpalmitate (Sigma Chemical Co.St.Louis, USA).<br />
* Other materials were mentioned previously in chapter two.<br />
2. Equipment:<br />
These were mentioned previously in chapter two.<br />
3. Software:<br />
These were mentioned previously in chapter two.<br />
4. Methods:<br />
4.1. UV scanning of Glib:<br />
About 20 and 100 μg /ml of Glib in methanol were scanned<br />
spectrophotometerically from 200-400 nm using methanol as blank.<br />
4.2. Construction of calibration curve of Glib in sörensen’phosphate<br />
buffer pH 7.4.<br />
0.1 gram of Glib were dissolved in 100 ml methanol to obtain a<br />
solution of concentration of 1mg/ml, 10 ml is diluted to 100 ml with<br />
sörensen’ buffer pH 7.4 to produce a solution containing 100 μg /ml of<br />
Glib . Aliquots of 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, and 3 ml were furtherly diluted to 10<br />
88
ml with sörensen’ buffer pH 7.4. After dilution, the solution contained 10,<br />
15, 20, 25, and 30 μg/ml of Glib respectively.<br />
The calibration equation was constructed by regressing the relative<br />
absorbances, against the corresponding Glib solutionsconcentrations at<br />
227 nm using sörensen’ buffer pH 7.4 as blank.<br />
4.3. Solubility measurements:<br />
Solubility studies were carried out according to the method of<br />
Higuchi and Connors, (1965) as mentioned before.<br />
4.4. Determination of partition coefficient of Glib:<br />
Partition coefficient of Glib in octanol/water system was determined<br />
as mentioned before.<br />
4.5. The methods of preparation of topical preparations:<br />
The following formulae were selected in which 10 mg of Glib in<br />
each 1 gm of the topical base were incorporated.<br />
4.5.1. Water soluble base:<br />
Polyethylene glycol base :( U.S.P. XXII).<br />
PEG 4000 40 gm<br />
PEG 400 60 gm<br />
Preparation<br />
Water soluble base was prepared as mentioned before.<br />
4.5.2. Absorption base: (U.S.P.XXII)<br />
White soft paraffin 95 gm.<br />
Span 80 5 gm<br />
89
4.5.3. Oleaginous base: (Ammar., et al 2007)<br />
White soft paraffin 100 gm.<br />
Preparation:<br />
Accurate amount of the drug was weighed, levigated and<br />
incorporated into the melted base with continuous stirring until congealed<br />
then packed into plastic jar until used.<br />
4.5.4. Emulsion base:<br />
O/W emulsion base (Beeler’s base) (Ezzedeen et al., 1986):<br />
White bees wax 1 gm<br />
Cetyl alcohol 15 gm<br />
Propylene glycol 10 gm<br />
Sodium lauryl sulphate 2 gm.<br />
Water 72 gm.<br />
Preparation:<br />
O/W emulsion base was prepared as mentioned previously.<br />
4.5.5. Gel bases:<br />
* Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose gel (Sobati, 1998):<br />
HPMC 12 gm<br />
water 88 gm<br />
* Sodium alginate gel (Sobati, 1998):<br />
Sodium alginate 8 gm<br />
Water 92 gm<br />
90
Preparation:<br />
The drug was dispersed in a quantity of water then the gelling agent<br />
was added with continuous stirring and was set aside for complete<br />
swelling and the weight was adjusted by the addition of the water.<br />
:<br />
4.5.6. Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose emulgel (Gehan, 1999):<br />
Liquid paraffin 20 gm<br />
Tween 80 1 gm<br />
Water 70 gm<br />
HPMC 9 gm<br />
Preparation:<br />
-A mixture of the aqueous phase containing hydrophilic emulsifier was<br />
added to the oily phase to form a primary O/W emulsion.<br />
- Drug was suspended into the primary emulsion, then the specified<br />
quantity of the gelling agent powder was sprinkled on the emulsion<br />
surface and was left a side for complete swelling and formation of<br />
emulgel.<br />
All the formulations mentioned previously were summarized in Table 24<br />
91
Table 24 : Composition of different topical formulations.<br />
Type of<br />
base<br />
PEG<br />
4000<br />
Water<br />
soluble<br />
base<br />
(PEG<br />
base)<br />
30<br />
PEG 400 70<br />
Span 80 5<br />
Absorp<br />
t-ion<br />
base<br />
Oleagino<br />
u-s base<br />
92<br />
Emulsio<br />
n base<br />
(O/W<br />
base)<br />
Gel base<br />
HPMC Sod.<br />
Algin<br />
a-te<br />
Soft<br />
paraffin<br />
95 100<br />
Propylene<br />
glycol<br />
10<br />
White<br />
bees wax<br />
1<br />
Sodium<br />
lauryl<br />
sulphate<br />
2<br />
HPMC 12 8 9<br />
Tween 80 2<br />
Liquid<br />
paraffin<br />
Sodium<br />
alginate<br />
20<br />
Water 88 92 69<br />
Emulg<br />
el base<br />
(HPM<br />
C<br />
emulge<br />
l)
4.6. In vitro release of Glib from different topical formulation:<br />
The release study was determined using the simple dialysis<br />
technique as mentioned in part one. 1 gm of the tested formulation<br />
containing (10 mg of the drug) was accurately weighted over the<br />
cellophane membrane (Donor). The diffusion cell was placed at the center<br />
of 1000 ml dissolution cell containing 100 ml of phosphate buffer pH 7.4<br />
(Receptor). The stirring rate was 100 rpm and the temperature was<br />
maintained at 37 ± 0.5 °C<br />
At suitable time intervals 2.5 ml sample was withdrawn from the<br />
sink solution assayed spectrophotometerically at 227 nm using a suitable<br />
blank.A similar volume of buffer was added to mentain the volume of<br />
receptor constant. Each experiment was done in triplicate, and the<br />
average was calculated. The cumulative amount of the drug released was<br />
calculated as mentioned in chapter one.<br />
4.7. Penetration enhancers screening procedure:<br />
In order to select penetration enhancers which lend themselves to a<br />
more detailed investigation, the screening procedure were developed<br />
based on the percentage of the drug released after six hours.<br />
4.8. Effect of incorporation of different penetration enhancers in<br />
water soluble base:<br />
On the basis of results obtained in the previous screening, different<br />
penetration enhancers with different concentrations were incorporated in<br />
the topical formulation that demonstrated the best release results (water<br />
soluble base) as shown in (Table 25 ). In vitro release of these<br />
preparations was done as mentioned above.<br />
Table 25 : Types of penetration enhancers and percentages used.<br />
93
Penetration enhancers Percentages used<br />
(A)Surfactants<br />
1.Cationic surfactant<br />
(cetrimide) 0.3 0.5 1 2<br />
2.Anionic surfactant<br />
(SLS) 0.1 0.4 0.8<br />
3. Non ionic surfactant<br />
i.Tween 80 (Tw-80) 0.3 1 4 5<br />
ii. Labrafil (Lab) 3 5 7<br />
B) Solubilizing agents<br />
Transcutol (Tc) 5 8<br />
(C) Unsaturated free<br />
fatty acids<br />
1. Oleic acid (OA)<br />
0.5<br />
94<br />
1 <br />
2. Linoleic acid (LOA) 0.8 <br />
(D) Fatty acid esters<br />
1.Isopropyl myristate<br />
(IPM)<br />
2. Isopropyl palmitate<br />
(IPP)<br />
0.5<br />
<br />
0.2
4.9. Kinetic evaluation of the in vitro release data:<br />
The data obtained from the experiments were analyzed to know the<br />
mechanism of the release of the drug using the following kinetic<br />
equations:<br />
(I) Zero order kinetics: A=A-k<br />
(II) First order kinetics: ln A = ln A- kt<br />
log A = log A- kt/ 2.303<br />
(III) Higuchi diffusion model:<br />
M = Q = 2C ) ½<br />
4.10. In vitro permeation of glibenclamide through abdominal rabbit<br />
skin:<br />
Preparation of the rabbit skin and in vitro permeation of Glib were<br />
done by the same methods mentioned in part one.<br />
4.11. Statistical analysis:<br />
Data were expressed as mean of three experiments ± the standard<br />
error (S.E.). The obtained data were compared statistically using One-<br />
way analysis of variance (ANOVA) test of significance on a computer<br />
statistical SPSS analysis program. A p-value of 0.05 or less was<br />
considered to be significant (Suwanpidokkul et al., 2004).<br />
4.12. In vivo studies:<br />
4.12.1. Animals:<br />
The animals used for the anti diabetic and hypoglycemic activity study<br />
were white adult albino rats weighing between 200-250g. The animals<br />
were housed under standard laboratory conditions.<br />
95
4.12.2. Hypoglycemic activity in normal rats:<br />
The hair on the backside of the rats was removed with an electric hair<br />
clipper on the previous day of the experiment. The oral doses were given<br />
using a round tipped stainless steel needle attached to 1 ml syringe.<br />
Following an overnight fast, rats were divided into7 groups (n=5). The<br />
rats were treated as follows:<br />
Group I (Control) – 1ml gum acacia suspension was given orally.<br />
- 5 mg/kg Glib in mucilage of gum acacia was given orally<br />
(Mutalik and Udupa, 2005).<br />
Group III - 5 mg drug incorporated in 1gm water soluble ointment base<br />
was applied topically.<br />
Group IV - 5 mg drug incorporated in 1gm water soluble ointment base<br />
containing 1% oleic acid was applied topically.<br />
Group V - 5 mg drug incorporated in 1gm water soluble ointment base<br />
containing 1% cetrimide was applied topically.<br />
Group VI - 5 mg drug incorporated in 1gm water soluble ointment base<br />
containing 1% isopropylmyristate was applied topically.<br />
Group VII - 5 mg drug incorporated in 1gm water soluble ointment<br />
base containing 5% Labrafil was applied topically.<br />
At time intervals between 2-24 h after treatment blood was collected<br />
from orbital sinuses; blood glucose levels were determined using the<br />
glucometer.<br />
96
4.12.3. Hypoglycemic activity in diabetic rats:<br />
4.12.3.1. Induction of diabetes mellitus:<br />
The overnight fasted rats were made diabetic by a single<br />
intraperitoneal injection of streptozotocin (STZ) (50 mg/kg; i.p) dissolved<br />
in citrate buffer (pH 4.5). The blood glucose was measured after 24 hrs<br />
and animals with blood glucose levels >250 mg/dL were selected<br />
(Sridevi et al., 2000).<br />
4.12.3.2. Anti-diabetic activity in diabetic rats:<br />
The anti diabetic activity of the prepared topical preparation was<br />
evaluated in overnight fasted diabetic rats.<br />
Diabetic rats were divided into 3 groups (n=5). The rats were treated as<br />
follows:<br />
Group I (Control) – 1ml gum acacia suspension was given orally.<br />
Group II -Glib 5 mg/kg was given orally (Mutalik and Udupa, 2005).<br />
Group III –5 mg drug incorporated in 1gm water soluble ointment base<br />
in presence of 1% cetrimide was applied topically.<br />
At time intervals between 2-24 h after treatment blood was<br />
collected from orbital sinuses; blood glucose levels were determined<br />
using the glucometer.<br />
4.12.4. Statistical analysis:<br />
Data were expressed as mean of three experiments ± the standard<br />
error (S.E.). The obtained data were compared statistically using One-<br />
way analysis of variance (ANOVA) test of significance on a computer<br />
statistical SPSS analysis program. A p-value of 0.05 or less was<br />
considered to be significant (Suwanpidokkul et al., 2004).<br />
97
1. UV scanning of Glib:<br />
Results and Discussion<br />
UV scanning of Glib in methanol was carried out (Figure44). Three<br />
absorption maxima were observed at 299, 278 and 227 nm at<br />
concentration of Glib of (100 μg/ml) and nearly the same wavelengths<br />
were observed at concentration of Glib of (20μg/ml) with lower intensity.<br />
The measurements were done at 227 nm (Siavoush et al., 2005).<br />
20 μg/ml<br />
227nm<br />
100 μg/ml<br />
278nm<br />
Wavelength<br />
Figure 44: UV absorption spectra for Glib in methanol.<br />
98<br />
299nm
2. Calibration curves of Glib in sörensen’s phosphate buffer pH (7.4):<br />
(Figure 45) show a linear relationship between the absorbance and<br />
the concentration of Glib in sörensen’s phosphate buffer pH 7.4 at the<br />
max in the concentration range used.<br />
3. Solubility measurements:<br />
In the present study, the solubility of the Glib in distilled water and<br />
in sörensen’s phosphate buffer pH 7.4 at 25 C was found to be 4.41<br />
μg/ml and 16.19 μg/ml respectively.<br />
4. Partition coefficient of Glib:<br />
In the present study, the partition coefficient of Glib was found<br />
to be 2.05 (log octanol/ water =0.312) and this is in agreement with that<br />
observed by Srinivas and Nayanabhirama, 2005, who found that the<br />
log octanol /buffer = 0.32.<br />
99
5. Release of Glib from different topical bases:<br />
The influence of the type of base on the in vitro release of Glib has<br />
been studied. The bases investigated consisted of ointment (water soluble<br />
base, emulsion base, absorption base, and oleaginous base), emulgel and<br />
gel (HPMC and sodium alginate gels).<br />
Results of release from different topical bases are summarized in<br />
(Table 26) and graphically illustrated in (Figures 46-47).<br />
Due to the high lipid solubility and low water solubility (4.41<br />
μg/ml) of Glib, this may explain the slow release of the drug that is<br />
observed from all bases.<br />
From the data obtained it is clear that the percentage amount of drug<br />
released from water soluble base, gel bases and emulgel base are greater<br />
than that released from other bases. The rate of drug release can be<br />
arranged in the following descending order:<br />
Water soluble base (5.94 %) > HPMC emulgel (4.6 %) > sodium alginate<br />
gel (4.38 %) > HPMC gel (3.99) >O/W emulsion base (2.5 %) ><br />
absorption base (1.94%) > oleaginous base (1.61%).It is clear that, water<br />
soluble base showed the highest release than that of emulsion, gels,<br />
emulgel, oleaginous and absorption bases.<br />
100
Table 26: In vitro release of glibenclamide from different topical bases.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min) WSB HPMC emulgel Sodium alginate gel HPMC gel<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 0.54 ± 0 0.65 ± 0.07 0.73 ± 0.016<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 1.22 ± 0.06 0.95 ± 0.05 1.16 ± 0.06<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 2.09 ± 0.14 1.45 ± 0.08 1.71 ± 0.13<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 2.19 ± 0.19 1.97 ± 0.12 2.36 ± 0.03<br />
150 2.86 ± 0.14 2.46 ± 0.048 2.44 ± 0.26 2.46 ± 0.14<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 2.71 ± .062 2.68 ± 0.16 2.5 ± 0.25<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 3.39 ± 0.17 3.15 ± 0.28 2.91 ± 0.15<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 3.86 ± 0.18 4.14 ± 0.31 3.40 ± 0.25<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 4.6 ± 0.27 4.38 ± 0.3 3.99 ± 0.05<br />
101
Cont.Table 26: In vitro release of glibenclamide from different topical bases.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min) O/W cream Absorption base Oleaginous base<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.54 ± 0 0.44 ± 0.02 0.60 ± 0.013<br />
60 0.65± 0.03 0.49 ± 0 0.89 ± 0.06<br />
90 0.97 ± 0.038 0.97 ± 0.13 0.91 ± 0.13<br />
120 1.13 ± 0.06 1.055 ± 0.21 1.22 ± 0.12<br />
150 1.97 ± 0.08 1.12 ± 0.08 1.27 ± 0.08<br />
180 1.81± 0.04 1.27 ± 0.15 1.48 ± 0.15<br />
240 1.92 ± 0.07 1.35 ± 0.56 1.34 ± 0.2<br />
300 2.2 ± 0.09 1.37 ± 0.9 1.51 ± 0.14<br />
360 2.5 ± 0.1 1.94 ± 0.38 1.61 ± 0.17<br />
102
WSB base HPMC gel HPMC emulgel Sodium alginate gel<br />
O/W cream Oleagineous base Absorption base<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
4<br />
3<br />
% drug releasesd<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 46: Release profile of glibenclamide from different topical bases.<br />
103
The highest release may be attributed to the rapid dissolution of the base<br />
in water and the possible solubilizing effect of the base components<br />
(Moes, 1982; Anshel, 1976)<br />
(Chakole et al., 2009) found that halobetasol propionate and Fusidic<br />
acid ointment formulation containing water miscible base showed better<br />
in-vitro release profile in comparison to oleaginous base.<br />
(Dhavse and Amin, 1997) stated that norfloxacin formulations<br />
containing polyethylene glycol and Carbopol gel base showed better in<br />
vitro release profile in comparison to creams and ointment base<br />
formulations.<br />
The higher release of the Glib from emulgel and gel bases than O/W<br />
emulsion base, oleaginous and absorption ointment bases is considered to<br />
be due to the high miscibility of these bases with the dissolution medium.<br />
The higher release of the Glib from emulgel than gel bases is<br />
considered to be due to the presence of Tween80 which can facilitate the<br />
release of drug.<br />
The lower release of the drug from O/W emulsion base than from<br />
water soluble base, emulgel and gels owing to its biphasic nature which<br />
leading to partitioning of the drug in 2 phases, that results in slower<br />
release of drug (Dhavse and Amin, 1997)<br />
The higher release of the Glib from O/W emulsion base than from<br />
absorbtion base and oleaginous base may be due to the formation of a<br />
continuous contact between the external phase of the O/W emulsion base<br />
and the buffer (Nakano et al., 1976).<br />
104
7<br />
WSB<br />
6<br />
WSB<br />
HPMC emulgel<br />
Sod. alginate<br />
HPMC gel<br />
O/W cream<br />
Absorption base<br />
Oleaginous base<br />
5<br />
HPMC emulgel<br />
Sod. alginate<br />
HPMC gel<br />
4<br />
3<br />
O/W cream<br />
% Drug released<br />
Absorption base<br />
Oleaginous base<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
1<br />
Figure 47: Percentage drug released from different topical bases.<br />
105
In case of oleaginous base and absorption base, the external phase is non-<br />
polar and immiscible with the polar diffusion medium hence retardation<br />
of drug release is expected. Also this low release may be attributed to the<br />
closing of the cellophane membrane pores with the fatty base and<br />
prevention of penetration of the acceptor medium through the membrane<br />
to dissolve the drug (Habib and El-Shanawany, 1989).<br />
6. Effect of incorporation of penetration enhancers:<br />
The transdermal route has been recognized as one of the highly<br />
potential routes of systemic drug delivery and provides the advantage of<br />
avoidance of the first-pass effect, ease of use and withdrawal (in case of<br />
side effects), and better patient compliance. However, the major<br />
limitation of this route is the difficulty of permeation of drug through the<br />
skin (Sinha and Maninder, 2000). Studies have been carried out to find<br />
safe and suitable permeation enhancers to promote the percutaneous<br />
absorption of Glib.<br />
106
6.1. Effect of incorporation of surfactants:<br />
The effect of surfactant on the release of Glib from the prepared<br />
water soluble base is shown in (Tables 27- 30) and (Figures 49-53).<br />
Anionic, cationic and non-ionic surfactants were used.<br />
6.1.1. Anionic surfactants:<br />
Incorporation of sodium lauryl sulphate (SLS) in concentrations of<br />
0.4% and 0.8% increased the percentage of drug released from 5.94 % to<br />
7.95% and 7.12% respectively. While incorporation of SLS in<br />
concentration of 0.1% decreased the amount of drug released by (-1.06<br />
fold) in comparison to control.<br />
Nokhodchi et al., 2003 studied the enhancing effects of SLS on the<br />
permeation of lorazepam through rat skin and he found that, sodium<br />
lauryl sulphate at a concentration of 5% w/w (the highest concentration)<br />
exhibited the greatest increase in flux of lorazepam compared with<br />
control.<br />
6.1.2. Cationic surfactants:<br />
Incorporation of cetrimide (Cetylpyridiniumbromide) in<br />
concentrations of 0.3%, 0.5% and 1% increased the percentage of drug<br />
released from 5.94 % to 7.18%, 8.75% and 9.48% respectively. While<br />
incorporation of cetrimide in concentration of 2% decreased the amount<br />
of drug released by (-1.17 fold) in comparison to control.<br />
6.1.3. Non-ionic surfactants:<br />
<br />
5% increased the percentage of drug released from 5.94 % to 9.05% and<br />
6.76% respectively. While incorporation of Tween 80 in concentration of<br />
0.3% and 1% decreased the amount of drug released by (-1.04 fold) in<br />
comparison to control. This is in accordance with (Ramadan, 2008) who<br />
studied Enhancement factors for the penetration of miconazole through<br />
cellulose barrier from different bioadhesive gels containing different<br />
107
concentrations of Tween80 and she found that, 1% concentration of<br />
enhancers used seems to be the optimum concentration at which the<br />
maximum release and concentration of enhancers beyond the maximum<br />
concentration would be responsible for permeability coefficient declined<br />
and reducing of enhancement effect. Enhancer at high level showed a<br />
lower tendency to solubilize the drug which may be attributed to complex<br />
formation.<br />
-6 glycerides) in<br />
concentrations of 3% and 5% increased the percentage of drug released<br />
from 5.94 % to 7.32% and 10.03% respectively. While incorporation of<br />
labrafil in concentration of 7% decreased the amount of drug released by<br />
(-1.11 fold) in comparison to control.<br />
Choi et al., 2003 found that incorporation of 1.5% of labrafil in<br />
50/50 buffer (pH 10)/ PG solvent mixture increased the permeability of<br />
clenbuterol through hairless mouse skin approximately 8 folds more than<br />
control without permeation enhancer.<br />
Based on the above mentioned results, it is obvious that addition of<br />
the surfactant into the ointment base could result in increased solubility of<br />
the hydrophobic drug, leading to the increase in the drug release rate<br />
(Sarisuta et al., 1999). In addition increasing the concentration of<br />
surfactant may decrease drug release and this may be attributed to<br />
miceller complexation which decreases thermodynamic activity of the<br />
drug (Fergany, 2001).<br />
108
Table 27: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of cetrimide.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 0.3% 0.5% 1% 2%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 0.69 ± 0.2 0.7 ± 0.07 1.09 ± 0.035 0.6 ± 0.01<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 1.11 ± 0.12 2.02 ± 0.16 2.23 ± 0.11 1.1 ± 0<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 2.36 ± 0.14 3.26 ± 0.37 3.29 ± 0.18 1.72± 0.01<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 3.15 ± 0.14 4.22 ± 0.33 4.3 ± 0.07 2.18 ± 0.04<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 3.75 ± 0.19 5.16 ± 0.33 5.2 ± 0.51 2.57 ± 0. 2<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 4.41 ± 0.34 5.89 ± 0.12 6.1± 0.53 3.22 ± 0.19<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 5.59 ± 0.17 6.84 ± 0.12 7.34 ± 0.48 3.64 ± 0.007<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 6.73 ± 0.18 7.87 ± 0.24 8.6 ± 0.16 4.17 ± 0.19<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 7.18 ± 0.19 8.75 ± 0.34 9.48 ± 0.56 5.05 ± 0.2<br />
109
Drug alone 0.3% cetrimide 0.5% cetrimide 1% cetrimide 2% cetrimide<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 49: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of cetrimide.<br />
110
Table 28: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of Sodium<br />
lauryl sulphate (SLS).<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 0.1% 0.4% 0.8%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 0.5 ± 0 1.96 ± 0.11 1.75 ± 0.014<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 1.42 ± 0.14 2.96 ± 0.07 2.59 ± 0.014<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 1.81 ± 0.09 3.66 ± 0.14 3.38± 0.077<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 2.22 ± 0.06 3.96 ± 0.16 3.83 ± 0.056<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 2.7 ± 0.19 4.41 ± 0.15 4.22 ± 0. 3<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 3.37 ± 0.11 4.96 ± 0.17 4.85 ± 0.13<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 4.3 ± 0.46 6.56 ± 0.16 5.9 ± 0.17<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 5.11 ± 0.35 7.26 ± 0. 4 6.92 ± 0.18<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 5.59 ± 0.41 7.95 ± 0.16 7.12 ± 0.18<br />
111
12<br />
Drug alone 0.1% SLS 0.4% SLS 0.8% SLS<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 50: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of SLS.<br />
112
Table 29: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of Tween 80.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 0.3% 1% 4% 5%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 0.67 ± 0.16 0.95 ± 0.1 1.72 ± 0.05 1.1 ± 0.05<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 1.32 ± 0.11 1.72 ± 0.2 2.47 ± 0.07 2.12 ± 0.07<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 1.95 ± 0.15 2.17 ± 0.07 3.45 ± 0.2 2.72± 0.04<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 2.44 ± 0.07 2.75 ± 0.16 4.33 ± 0.007 3.31± 0.13<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 3.03 ± 0.06 3.16 ± 0.03 5.3 ± 0.24 3.89 ± 0. 07<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 3.5 ± 0.15 3.68 ± 0.02 5.64± 0.26 4.37 ± 0.24<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 4.25 ± 0.1 4.99 ± 0.19 7.05 ± 0.14 5.08 ± 0.33<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 4.71 ± 0.09 4.97 ± 0.04 8.2 ± 0.15 5.81 ± 0.36<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 5.66 ± 0.09 5.69 ± 0.08 9.05 ± 0.23 6.76 ± 0.24<br />
113
Drug alone 0.3% Tw- 80 1% Tw- 80 4% Tw- 80 5% Tw- 80<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 51: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of Tween 80.<br />
114
Table 30: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of labrafil.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 3% 5% 7%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 1.68 ± 0 1.59 ± 0.27 0.84 ± 0.019<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 3.01 ± 0.17 3.23 ± 0.21 1.97 ± 0.2<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 3.56 ± 0.16 4.02 ± 0.23 2.46 ± 0.15<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 4.68 ± 0.25 4.96 ± 0.14 2.69 ± 0.36<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 5.43 ± 0.33 5.5 ± 0.37 2.98 ± 0.21<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 4.41 ± 0.18 5.97 ± 0.24 3.1 ± 0.17<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 5.86 ± 0.11 8.46 ± 0.14 4.13 ± 0.32<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 6.72 ± 0.22 9.3 ± 0.26 4.96 ± 0.25<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 7.32 ± 0.17 10.03 ± 0.18 5.33 ± 0.22<br />
115
Drug alone Lab 3% Lab 5% Lab 7%<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 52: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of labrafil.<br />
116
117
Drug alone Cetrimide 0.3% Cetrimide 0.5% Cetrimide 1% Cetrimide 2%<br />
SLS 0.1% SLS 0.4% SLS 0.8% Tw 80 0.3% Tw 80 1%<br />
Tw 80 4% Tw 80 5% Lab 3% Lab 5% Lab 7%<br />
12<br />
Lab 5%<br />
Cetrimide<br />
1%<br />
10<br />
Tw 80 4%<br />
Cetrimide<br />
0.5%<br />
SLS 0.4%<br />
Lab 3%<br />
Cetrimide<br />
0.3%<br />
8<br />
Tw 80<br />
5%<br />
SLS 0.8%<br />
Tw 80<br />
1%<br />
Tw 80<br />
0.3%<br />
SLS<br />
0.1%<br />
Drug<br />
Lab 7%<br />
Cetrimide<br />
2%<br />
6<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
2<br />
0<br />
1<br />
Figure 53: Percentage drug released from water soluble base containing different concentrations of different<br />
surfactants.<br />
118
6.2. Effect of incorporation of fatty acids:<br />
The effect of unsaturated fatty acids on the release of Glib from the<br />
prepared water soluble base is shown in (Tables 31-32) and (Figures 54-<br />
56).<br />
<br />
increased the percentage of drug released from 5.94 % to 6.19% and<br />
8.8%. However, concentrations of 2% and 3% increased the release of<br />
Glib when compared with the control but didn't lead to a further increase<br />
in permeation and this is with agreement with (Ammar., et al 2007) who<br />
studied the effect of oleic acid on the transdermal delivery of aspirin and<br />
he found that oleic acid enhanced aspirin permeation from CMC gel base<br />
at a concentration of 5% or 10% However, a concentration of 20%<br />
enhanced the permeation when compared with the control but didn't lead<br />
to a further increase in permeation. This may be attributed to an increase<br />
in the lipophilicity of the vehicle (Ammar., et al 2006).<br />
<br />
2% increased the percentage of drug released from 5.94 % to 7.34%,<br />
6.56% and 6.43% respectively.<br />
Gwak and Chun, 2001 studied the effect of linoleic acid on<br />
transdermal delivery of aspalatone and they found that, linoleic acid<br />
(LOA) at the concentration of 5% was found to have the largest<br />
enhancement factor. However, a further increase in aspalatone flux was<br />
not found in the fatty acid concentration greater than 5%, indicating the<br />
enhancement effect is in a bell-shaped curve<br />
119
Table 31: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of oleic acid.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 0.5% 1% 2% 3%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 0.87 ± 0 1.59 ± 0.16 1.15 ± 0.023 1.31 ± 0.035<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 2.13 ± 0.05 2.7 ± 0.15 2.71 ± 0.36 2.08 ± 0.14<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 2.95 ± 0.09 3.89 ± 0.13 3.74 ± 0.35 2.81± 0.25<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 3.44 ± 0.07 4.5 ± 0.39 4.15 ± 0.17 3.08± 0.37<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 3.71 ± 0.08 4.96 ± 0.4 4.73 ± 0.24 3.5 ± 0. 32<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 4.24 ± 0.13 5.86 ± 0.34 5.4± 0.45 3.87 ± 0.24<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 5.05 ± 0.21 7.09 ± 0.32 6.82 ± 0.43 4.98 ± 0.19<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 5.64 ± 0.35 7.9 ± 0.45 7.4 ± 0.15 5.38 ± 0.22<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 6.19 ± 0.27 8.8 ± 0.4 7.67 ± 0.19 6.68 ± 0.21<br />
120
Drug alone 0.5% OA 1% OA 2% OA 3% OA<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 54: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of oleic<br />
acid.<br />
121
Table 32: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of linoleic<br />
acid.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 0.8% 1% 2%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 1.54 ± 0.024 1.45 ± 0.09 0.97 ± 0.1<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 2.42 ± 0.17 1.98 ± 0.16 1.95 ± 0.15<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 2.9 ± 0.17 2.73 ± 0.23 2.51 ± 0.06<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 3.33± 0.28 3.27 ± 0.09 3.22 ± 0.25<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 4.31 ± 0.38 3.84 ± 0.18 3.81 ± 0. 09<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 4.9 ± 0.35 4.42 ± 0.44 4.2 ± 0.26<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 5.89 ± 0.59 5.2 ± 0.24 5.12 ± 0.28<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 6.66 ± 0.52 6.45 ± 0.28 5.9 ± 0.42<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 7.34 ± 0.48 6.56 ± 0.47 6.43 ± 0.37<br />
122
Drug alone 0.8% LOA 1% LOA 2% LOA<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 55: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of linoleic<br />
acid.<br />
123
10<br />
Drug alone OA 0.5% OA 1% OA 2% OA 3% LOA 0.8% LOA 1% LOA 2%<br />
OA 1%<br />
9<br />
OA 2%<br />
8<br />
LOA 0.8%<br />
LOA 1%<br />
OA 3%<br />
7<br />
LOA 2%<br />
OA 0.5%<br />
Drug alone<br />
6<br />
5<br />
4<br />
% Drug released<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
1<br />
Figure 56: Percentage drug released from water soluble base containing different concentrations of fatty acids.<br />
124
6.3. Effect of incorporation of fatty acid esters:<br />
The effect of fatty acid esters namely isopropylpalmitate (IPP) and<br />
isopropylmyristate (IPM) on the release of Glib from the prepared water<br />
soluble base is shown in (Tables 33-34) and (Figures 57, 58 and 60).<br />
<br />
increased the percentage of drug released from 5.94 % to 6.11%, 10.26%<br />
and 6.82% respectively.<br />
<br />
increased the percentage of drug released from 5.94 % to 8.39%, 7.33%<br />
and 7.025% respectively.<br />
Malay et al., 2006 investigated the effect of (10% W/W) IPP and<br />
IPM on transdermal permeation of trazodone hydrochloride from matrix-<br />
based formulations through the skin and he found that, the highest<br />
enhancing effect was obtained with IPM followed by IPP. The<br />
permeation of TZN in the presence of 10% w/w of IPM and IPP was 3.79<br />
and 2.00 times greater, respectively, than that in absence of these<br />
enhancers.<br />
125
Table 33: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of<br />
Isopropylmyristate (IPM).<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 0.5% 1% 2%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 1.36 ± 0.019 1.67 ± 0.05 1.55 ± 0.012<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 2.31 ± 0.17 3.45 ± 0.05 2.61 ± 0.13<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 2.72 ± 0.04 4.7 ± 0.13 3.51± 0.1<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 3.17 ± 0.07 5.4 ± 0.24 3.71 ± 0.3<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 3.54 ± 0.16 6.33 ± 0.06 4.13 ± 0. 26<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 3.95 ± 0.28 6.94 ± 0.33 4.84 ± 0.4<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 4.71 ± 0.23 8.09 ± 0.41 5.67 ± 0.05<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 5.36± 0.51 9.33 ± 0. 14 6.07 ± 0.16<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 6.11 ± 0.24 10.26 ± 0.4 6.82 ± 0.27<br />
126
Drug alone 0.5%IPM 1% IPM 2% IPM<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 57: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of<br />
isopropyl myristate.<br />
127
Table 34: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of<br />
Isopropylpalmitate (IPP).<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 0.2% 1% 2%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 0.86 ± 0.03 1.19 ± 0.11 0.89 ± 0.011<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 2.19 ± 0.09 2.15 ± 0.11 1.95 ± 0.11<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 3.02 ± 0.04 3.09 ± 0.28 2.75± 0.16<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 3.51 ± 0.02 3.58 ± 0.02 3.41± 0.12<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 3.94 ± 0.04 4.04 ± 0.06 3.84 ± 0. 29<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 4.93 ± 0.04 4.65 ± 0.24 4.65 ± 0.09<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 6.37 ± 0.35 5.55 ± 0.14 5.49 ± 0.24<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 7.34± 0.04 6.34 ± 0. 31 6.02 ± 0.042<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 8.39 ± 0.34 7.33 ± 0.4 7.025 ± 0.31<br />
128
Drug alone 0.2% IPP 1% IPP 2% IPP<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 58: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of<br />
isopropyl palmitate (IPP).<br />
129
6.4. Effect of incorporation of solubilizing agent (Transcutol):<br />
The effect of Transcutol on the release of Glib from water soluble<br />
base is shown in (Table 35) and (Figures 59- 60).<br />
Transcutol (Tc) (Diethylene glycol monoethyl ether) is a powerful<br />
solubilizing agent used in several dosage forms and it seems to be very<br />
attractive as a penetration enhancer due to its non-toxicity,<br />
biocompatibility with the skin, miscibility with polar and non polar<br />
solvents and optimal solubilizing properties for a number of drugs<br />
(Barthelemy et al., 1995).<br />
Incorporation of Transcutol in concentrations of 5%and 8%<br />
increased the percentage of drug released from 5.94 % to 7.25% and 6.5%<br />
respectively. Mura et al., (2000) found that incorporation of 50% of<br />
Transcutol in carbapol hydrogel increased clonazepam flux three times<br />
more than control gel.<br />
The enhancing mechanism of Transcutol may be due to its powerful<br />
solubilizing ability and consequently drug leaching increased.<br />
Mutalik and Udupa, 2003 studied the effect of some penetration<br />
enhancers on in vitro permeation of Glib and glipizide through mouse<br />
skin. Ethanol in various concentrations, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone,<br />
Transcutol, propylene glycol and terpenes like citral, geraniol and<br />
eugenol were used as penetration enhancers. The flux values of both<br />
drugs significantly increased in the presence of all penetration enhancers,<br />
except Transcutol and propylene glycol.<br />
All data are summarized in (Figure 61).<br />
130
Table 35: In vitro release of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of Transcutol.<br />
Glibenclamide released % ± (sd)<br />
Time (min)<br />
0% 5% 8%<br />
0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0 0 ± 0<br />
30 0.68 ± 0 1.37 ± 0.04 1.05 ± 0.07<br />
60 1.5 ± 0.09 2.38 ± 0.017 1.82 ± 0.07<br />
90 1.71 ± 0.25 3.05 ± 0.14 2.350± 0<br />
120 2.25 ± 0.07 3.49 ± 0.19 2.82 ± 0<br />
150 2.68 ± 0.14 4.04 ± 0.28 3.29 ± 0. 03<br />
180 3.44 ± 0.12 5.4± 0.18 4.17 ± 0.07<br />
240 4.8 ± 0.25 5.65 ± 0.25 4.95 ± 0.14<br />
300 5.29 ± 0.11 6.99 ± 0.15 5.39 ± 0.13<br />
360 5.94 ± 0.41 7.25 ± 0.25 6.5 ± 0.33<br />
131
Drug alone 5% Tc 8% Tc<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
8<br />
7<br />
6<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
4<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Time (min)<br />
Figure 59: Release profile of glibenclamide from water soluble base containing different concentrations of<br />
Transcutol.<br />
132
12<br />
11<br />
IPM 1%<br />
10<br />
Drug alone<br />
9<br />
IPM 0.5%<br />
8<br />
IPM 1%<br />
Tc 5%<br />
IPP 0.2% IPP1%<br />
IPP 2%<br />
IPM 2%<br />
7<br />
IPM 2%<br />
Tc 8%<br />
IPM 0.5%<br />
Drug alone<br />
6<br />
IPP 0.2%<br />
IPP1%<br />
5<br />
% Drug released<br />
IPP 2%<br />
4<br />
Tc 5%<br />
3<br />
Tc 8%<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
Different enhancers with different concentrations<br />
Figure 60: Percentage drug released from water soluble base containing different concentrations of fatty acid<br />
esters and Transcutol.<br />
133
10<br />
Drug alone<br />
Tw 80 4%<br />
Cetrimide 0.5%<br />
9<br />
Cetrimide<br />
0.5%<br />
SLS 0.4%<br />
SLS 0.4%<br />
Urea 5%<br />
LOA 0.8%<br />
OA 2%<br />
8<br />
Lab 3% Tc 5%<br />
Tw 80 4%<br />
Labrazol 5%<br />
IPM 2% IPP2%<br />
7<br />
Lab 3%<br />
Drug alone<br />
6<br />
Tc 5%<br />
5<br />
IPM 2%<br />
IPP2%<br />
4<br />
% Drug released<br />
OA 2%<br />
3<br />
LOA 0.8%<br />
2<br />
Urea 5%<br />
1<br />
Labrazol 5%<br />
0<br />
Differtent penetration enhancers<br />
Figure 48: Percentage drug released from water soluble base containing different concentrations of different<br />
enhancers.<br />
134
7. Kinetic analysis of release data:<br />
As shown in (Table 36) the release data of Glib from all different<br />
topical formulations followed diffusion controlled mechanism (Higuchi<br />
model).<br />
8. In vitro permeation of gliclazide through abdominal rat skin:<br />
Skin permeation studies indicated that Glib permeation through<br />
hairless rabbit skin was negligible. The possible reasons for this result<br />
may be i) Glib , a lipophilic drug, was retained within the stratum<br />
corneum with no portioning into the viable epidermis or ii) most of the<br />
drug was used up to saturate the binding sites in the skin and the<br />
remaining drug was probably insufficient to provide a significant<br />
concentration gradient (Srini et al., 1998).<br />
135
Table 36: Kinetic data of the release of Glib from different topical<br />
bases.<br />
Topical<br />
Cont. table 36: Kinetic data of the release of Glib from different<br />
topical bases.<br />
Correlation coefficient (R)<br />
preparation Zero First Diffusion<br />
Topical bases<br />
WSB-SLS<br />
WSB-<br />
WSB-Tw -80<br />
WSB-Tc<br />
Cetrimide<br />
136<br />
Observed<br />
order<br />
WSB 0.9833 0.9784 0.9842 D.M<br />
HPMC gel 0.9356 0.9375 0.9694 D.M<br />
HPMC emulgel 0.9622 0.9642 0.9849 D.M<br />
Sod-alginate gel 0.9804 0.9814 0.9852 D.M<br />
O/W cream 0.9196 0.9205 0.9527 D.M<br />
Oleaginous base 0.8095 0.8102 0.8960 D.M<br />
Absorption base 0.8859 0.8865 0.8904 D.M<br />
0.1% SLS 0.9813 0.9881 0.9891 D.M<br />
0.4% SLS 0.9784 0.9857 0.9991 D.M<br />
0.8% SLS 0.9652 0.9674 0.9855 D.M<br />
0.3% cetrimide 0.9742 0.9768 0.9910 D.M<br />
0.5% cetrimide 0.9521 0.9573 0.9956 D.M<br />
1% cetrimide 0.9766 0.9803 0.9981 D.M<br />
2% cetrimide 0.9789 0.9804 0.9917 D.M<br />
0.3% Tw-80 0.980 0.9818 0.9954 D.M<br />
1% Tw-80 0.9801 0.9820 0.9974 D.M<br />
4% Tw-80 0.9722 0.9761 0.9987 D.M<br />
5% Tw-80 0.9781 0.9804 0.9962 D.M<br />
5% Tc 0.9806 0.9820 0.9859 D.M<br />
8% Tc 0.9836 0.9849 0.9881 D.M
Topical<br />
preparation<br />
WSB-<br />
WSB-oleic<br />
WSB-linoleic<br />
WSB-IPP<br />
WSB-IPM<br />
labrafil<br />
acid<br />
acid<br />
Correlation coefficient (R)<br />
Zero First Diffusion<br />
137<br />
Observed<br />
order<br />
3% lab 0.9063 0.9109 0.9676 D.M<br />
5 % lab 0.9729 0.9685 .9757 D.M<br />
7 % lab 0.9668 0.9685 0.9778 D.M<br />
0.5 % OA 0.9418 0.9458 0.9906 D.M<br />
1% OA 0.9614 0.9659 0.9970 D.M<br />
2% OA 0.9521 0.9553 0.9870 D.M<br />
3% OA 0.9855 0.9808 0.9808 D.M<br />
0.8 % LOA 0.9752 0.9774 0.9895 D.M<br />
1 % LOA 0.9728 0.9755 0.9991 D.M<br />
2% LOA 0.9773 0.9791 0.9897 D.M<br />
0.2% IPP 0.9569 0.9594 0.9840 D.M<br />
1% IPP 0.9793 0.9819 0.9979 D.M<br />
2% IPP 0.9662 0.9692 0.9965 D.M<br />
0.5% IPM 0.9834 0.9851 0.9950 D.M<br />
1% IPM 0.9636 0.9688 0.9971 D.M<br />
2% IPM 0.9556 0.9587 0.9918 D.M
9- In- vivo study:<br />
The result of hypoglycemic activity of the topically applied glibenclamide<br />
and oral glibenclamide (5 mg/kg; p.o.) in both normal and diabetic rats<br />
are shown in (Table 37-41) and (Figures 61-62).<br />
The blood glucose reducing effect was significant in oral and all<br />
topically treated groups up to 24 h except groups treated with ointment<br />
contained 5% Labrafil, compared with control group (p<br />
*** Studies in normal rats<br />
Glib (oral) produced a significant decrease of 58.09 % ± 1.5 (p<br />
0.05 compared to control) in blood glucose levels at 2 hr and then the<br />
blood glucose levels decreased. The percentage reduction in the blood<br />
glucose levels at the end of 24 hr were 30.61 ± 3.4. On other hand, the<br />
blood glucose reducing response of all topical formulation was gradual<br />
and increased slowly up to 24 h.<br />
The effect of OA and cetrimide in amount of 1% within the Glib<br />
ointment on reducing the blood glucose level is shown in (Figure 62).<br />
OA and cetrimide increased significantly the blood glucose reducing<br />
activity of glib<br />
OA is a popular penetration enhancer and penetrates into the stratum<br />
corneum and decompresses this layer and hence reduces its' resistance to<br />
drug penetration (Barry and Bennett, 1987). OA can also accumulate<br />
within the lipid bilayers of stratum corneum cells and hence increase their<br />
flowability and penetration ability (Goodman and Barry, 1988).<br />
138
Table 37: Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and topical application of glibenclamide and glibenclamide with<br />
1% oleic acid in normal rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
.<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
(Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels)<br />
Absolute<br />
blood<br />
glucose level<br />
Group<br />
(mg/dl) 2hr 4hr 6hr 8hr 24hr<br />
71 ± 2.94<br />
(24.64 ± 1.5)<br />
77.5 ± 5.74<br />
(17.59 ±2.1)<br />
84.5 ± 2.08<br />
(10.53 ±1.84)<br />
84 ± 2.4<br />
(11.05± 2.49)<br />
94.5 ± 3.97 93.25 ± 3.4*<br />
(1.29±0.4)**<br />
Control<br />
(1ml gum<br />
acacia<br />
suspension)<br />
69.5 ± 4.2<br />
(30.61 ±3.4)<br />
59.25 ± 0.95<br />
(42.53 ±4.3)<br />
51.75± 4.3<br />
(49.9 ± 4.06)<br />
49.75 ± 5.3<br />
(50.48 ±6.6)<br />
103.75 ± 8.9 43 ± 4.4<br />
(58.09 ± 1.5)<br />
Oral<br />
glibenclamide<br />
(5mg/kg)<br />
51 ± 6.27<br />
(48.91 ± 4.2)<br />
57.25 ± 8.8<br />
(41.54 ± 3.6)<br />
66.00 ± 9.1<br />
(32.55± 2.14)<br />
69.25 ± 8.53<br />
(29.13± 1.75)<br />
97.75± 12.12 74.25± 9.06<br />
(23.99± 2.84)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
40.75 ± 6.84<br />
(56.86 ± 3.8)<br />
56.5 ± 7.3<br />
(40.04 ±3.7)<br />
59.5 ± 6.6<br />
(36.68 ± 2.7)<br />
60.75 ± 5.9<br />
(35.26 ± 3.2)<br />
94.5± 13.1 69 ± 6.3<br />
(26.95 ±5.7)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
+1% oleic<br />
acid)<br />
* Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl). **Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels.<br />
139
Table 38 : Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and topical application of glibenclamide and glibenclamide<br />
with 1% cetrimide in normal rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
. .<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
(Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels)<br />
Group<br />
2hr 4hr 6hr 8hr 24hr<br />
Absolute<br />
blood<br />
glucose<br />
level<br />
(mg/dl)<br />
71 ± 2.94<br />
(24.64± 1.5)<br />
77.5 ± 5.74<br />
(17.59 ±2.1)<br />
84.5 ± 2.08<br />
(10.53 ±1.84)<br />
84 ± 2.4<br />
(11.05 ± 2.49)<br />
94.5 ± 3.97 93.25 ± 3.4*<br />
(1.29±0.46)**<br />
Control<br />
(1ml gum<br />
acacia<br />
suspension)<br />
69.5 ± 4.2<br />
(30.61 ±3.4)<br />
59.25 ± 0.95<br />
(42.53 ±4.3)<br />
51.75± 4.3<br />
(49.9 ± 4.06)<br />
49.75 ± 5.3<br />
(50.48 ±6.6)<br />
103.75± 8.9 43 ± 4.4<br />
(58.09 ± 1.5)<br />
Oral<br />
glibenclamide<br />
(5mg/kg)<br />
51 ± 6.27<br />
(48.91± 4.2)<br />
57.25 ± 8.8<br />
(41.54 ± 3.6)<br />
66.00 ± 9.1<br />
(32.55 ± 2.14)<br />
69.25 ± 8.53<br />
(29.13 ± 1.75)<br />
74.25± 9.06<br />
(23.99± 2.84)<br />
97.75±<br />
12.12<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
45.5 ± 6.3<br />
(60.9± 3.33)<br />
52.66 ± 6.8<br />
(54.54 ±3.17)<br />
60.75 ± 5.67<br />
(47.39 ± 3.3)<br />
70.33 ± 4.9<br />
(39.07 ± 2.4)<br />
115.5± 7.5 87.25 ±3.3<br />
(24.32 ±2.8)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
+1%<br />
cetrimide)<br />
*<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl). **Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels.<br />
140
Table 39 : Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and topical application of glibenclamide and glibenclamide<br />
with 1% isopropyl myristate (IPM) in normal rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
(Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels)<br />
Absolute<br />
blood glucose<br />
level (mg/dl)<br />
Group<br />
2hr 4hr 6hr 8hr 24hr<br />
71 ± 2.94<br />
(24.64 ±<br />
1.5)<br />
77.5 ± 5.74<br />
(17.59 ±2.1)<br />
84.5 ± 2.08<br />
(10.53 ±1.84)<br />
84 ± 2.4<br />
(11.05 ± 2.49)<br />
94.5 ± 3.97 93.25 ± 3.4*<br />
(1.29±0.46)**<br />
Control<br />
(1ml gum<br />
acacia<br />
suspension)<br />
69.5 ± 4.2<br />
(30.61 ±3.4)<br />
59.25 ± 0.95<br />
(42.53 ±4.3)<br />
51.75± 4.3<br />
(49.9 ± 4.06)<br />
49.75 ± 5.3<br />
(50.48 ±6.6)<br />
103.75 ± 8.9 43 ± 4.4<br />
(58.09 ± 1.5)<br />
Oral<br />
glibenclamide<br />
(5mg/kg)<br />
51 ± 6.27<br />
(48.91 ±<br />
4.2)<br />
57.25 ± 8.8<br />
(41.54 ± 3.6)<br />
66.00 ± 9.1<br />
(32.55 ± 2.14)<br />
69.25 ± 8.53<br />
(29.13 ± 1.75)<br />
97.75 ± 12.12 74.25± 9.06<br />
(23.99± 2.84)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
50.5 ± 6.5<br />
(47.52 ±<br />
4.2)<br />
62.75 ± 12.89<br />
(35.26 ±3.2)<br />
69 ± 12.83<br />
(28.82± 2.38)<br />
78.25 ± 13.37<br />
(19.13 ± 3.23)<br />
97± 17.9 93 ± 17.75<br />
(4.16 ±0.93)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
+1% IPM)<br />
*<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl). **Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels.<br />
141
.Table 40 : Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and topical application of glibenclamide and glibenclamide<br />
with 5 % Labrafil in normal rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
(Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels)<br />
Absolute<br />
blood glucose<br />
level (mg/dl)<br />
Group<br />
2hr 4hr 6hr 8hr 24hr<br />
71 ± 2.94<br />
(24.64 ±<br />
1.5)<br />
77.5 ± 5.74<br />
(17.59 ±2.1)<br />
84.5 ± 2.08<br />
(10.53 ±1.84)<br />
84 ± 2.4<br />
(11.05 ± 2.49)<br />
94.5 ± 3.97 93.25 ± 3.4*<br />
(1.29±0.46)**<br />
Control<br />
(1ml gum<br />
acacia<br />
suspension)<br />
69.5 ± 4.2<br />
(30.61<br />
±3.4)<br />
59.25 ± 0.95<br />
(42.53 ±4.3)<br />
51.75± 4.3<br />
(49.9 ± 4.06)<br />
49.75 ± 5.3<br />
(50.48 ±6.6)<br />
103.75 ± 8.9 43 ± 4.4<br />
(58.09 ± 1.5)<br />
Oral<br />
glibenclamide<br />
(5mg/kg)<br />
51 ± 6.27<br />
(48.9± 4.2)<br />
57.25 ± 8.8<br />
(41.54 ± 3.6)<br />
66.00 ± 9.1<br />
(32.55 ± 2.14)<br />
69.25 ± 8.53<br />
(29.13 ± 1.75)<br />
97.75 ± 12.12 74.25± 9.06<br />
(23.99± 2.84)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
75 ± 6.97<br />
(27.0±<br />
2.96)<br />
83.75 ± 9.7<br />
(18.017 ±2.5)<br />
95 ± 5.9<br />
(7.41 ± 2.14)<br />
95 ± 6.6<br />
(6.9 ± 2.5)<br />
102.75± 8.5 96.75 ± 6.3<br />
(5.7 ±1.9)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
+5% Labrafil)<br />
. *<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl). **Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels.<br />
142
.<br />
Control Oral glibenclamide Topical glibenclamide<br />
1% OA 1% Cetrimide 1% IPM<br />
5% Labrafil<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
30<br />
20<br />
% Reduction in blood glucose level<br />
10<br />
0<br />
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26<br />
Time (hr)<br />
Figure 62: Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral and topical administration of glibenclamide in normal<br />
rats.<br />
143
Cetrimide is a cataionic surfactant. It has a potential to solubilise<br />
lipids within the stratum corneum, swell the stratum corneum and interact<br />
with intercellular keratin so increase the permeation of the drug<br />
(Williams and Barry, 2004).<br />
Incorporation of both 1% IPM and 5% Labrafil did not show any<br />
enhancement in the blood glucose reducing activity (compared to Glib<br />
without enhancer).<br />
*** Studies in diabetic rats:<br />
Oral and topical groups showed significant hypoglycemic activity<br />
upto 24 hrs. The hypoglycemic effect produced by ointement containing<br />
Glib and 1% cetrimide in the animals is significantly less when compared<br />
to oral administration.<br />
Glib (oral) produced a significant decrease of 41.1 ± 5.25 (p<br />
compared to control) in blood glucose levels at 4 hr and then the blood<br />
glucose levels increased. On other hand, the blood glucose reducing<br />
response of topical formulation was gradual and increased slowly up to<br />
24 h.<br />
The results did not differ significantly in oral and topical groups<br />
after 24 hrs. The topically applied Glib and the oral drug produced<br />
decrease of 24.53 ± 3.74 and 25.7 ± 4.69 respectively, in the blood<br />
glucose levels after 24 hrs. This may be due to reduced insulin levels in<br />
diabetic models impairs principal metabolic pathways of sulphonylurea<br />
which resulted in its prolonged action in orally treated group (Stroev and<br />
Belkina, 1989).<br />
144
Table 41 : Reduction in blood glucose level after oral and topical application of glibenclamide and glibenclamide<br />
with 1% cetrimide in diabetic rats. All values are expressed as mean ± sd.<br />
.<br />
Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl)<br />
(Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels)<br />
Group<br />
2hr 4hr 6hr 8hr 24hr<br />
Absolute<br />
blood<br />
glucose<br />
level<br />
(mg/dl)<br />
223.4 ± 40.8<br />
(5.22 ± 2.74)<br />
224.4 ± 38.8<br />
(4.76±0.89)<br />
230.6 ± 40.8<br />
(2.16 ±1.68)<br />
232.2 ± 38.46<br />
(1.35 ± 1.06)<br />
228.4 ± 36.26*<br />
(2.89 ± 1.65)**<br />
235.6 ±<br />
40.3<br />
Control<br />
(1ml gum<br />
acacia<br />
suspension)<br />
364.8± 49.93<br />
(24.53 ±3.74)<br />
342 ± 51.63<br />
(29.25<br />
±3.75)<br />
318 ± 45.06<br />
(34.02± 5.67)<br />
283 ± 33.54<br />
(41.1 ±5.25)<br />
420.2 ± 62.81<br />
(15.63 ± 3.09)<br />
485 ±<br />
79.56<br />
Oral<br />
glibenclamide<br />
(5mg/kg)<br />
236.8 ± 23.53<br />
(25.7 ± 4.69)<br />
267.5± 25.99<br />
(16.16 ±2.7)<br />
277.2 ± 30.82<br />
(13.28± 3.5)<br />
286.7± 35.12<br />
(9.6 ± 4.4)<br />
319± 23.2 305± 21.37<br />
(4.28± 2.4)<br />
WSB<br />
(glibenclamide<br />
+1%<br />
cetrimide)<br />
. * Reduction in blood glucose level (mg/dl). **Percentage reduction in blood glucose levels.<br />
145
50<br />
Control<br />
Oral glibenclamide<br />
Topical glibenclamide<br />
45<br />
40<br />
35<br />
30<br />
25<br />
20<br />
15<br />
10<br />
% Reduction in blood glucose level(mg/dl)<br />
5<br />
0<br />
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26<br />
Time (hr)<br />
Figure 63 : Percent reduction in blood glucose levels after oral and topical administration of glibenclamide in<br />
diabetic rats.<br />
146
Conclusion:<br />
From the previously demonstrated data the following results can be<br />
concluded:<br />
1- Glib has a lipophilic property.<br />
2- The percentage amount of drug released from water soluble base, gel<br />
bases and emulgel base are greater than that released from other bases.<br />
The rate of drug release can be arranged in the following descending<br />
order:<br />
Water soluble base (5.94 %) > HPMC emulgel (4.6 %) > sodium alginate<br />
gel (4.38 %) > HPMC gel (3.99) >O/W emulsion base (2.5 %) ><br />
absorption base (1.94%) > oleaginous base (1.61%).It is clear that,<br />
water soluble base showed the highest release than that of emulsion,<br />
gels, emulgel, oleaginous and absorption bases.<br />
3- The investigation showed the effect of addition of penetration<br />
enhancers on the amount of Glib released from different topical bases<br />
in vitro can be arranged in the follwing descending order:<br />
1% IPM > 5% Lab > 1% Cetrimide > 4% Tw-80 > 1% OA > 0.2%<br />
IPP > 0.8% LOA > 0.4% SLS > 5% Tc.<br />
4- Topically applied glibenclamide exhibited better control of<br />
hyperglycemia and more effectively reversed the glibenclamide side<br />
effects than oral glibenclamide administration in both normal and<br />
diabetic rats. Slow and sustained release of the drug from the<br />
transdermal system might reduce<br />
manifestations like severe hypoglycemia, sulphonylurea receptor down<br />
regulation and the risk of chronic hyperinsulinemia ( Mutalik and<br />
Udupa, 2004).<br />
147
Ointments contained 1% cetrimide and 1% OA enhanced the blood<br />
glucose reducing activity of glibenclamide . While addition of 1% IPM<br />
and 5% Lab did not show any enhancement in the blood glucose reducing<br />
activity (compared to glib without enhancer).<br />
148
General Conclusion<br />
The preceding study was an attempt to evaluate the potential of<br />
pharmaceutical formulation of certain sulfonylureas namely, gliclazide<br />
and glibenclamide in different bases for topical application.<br />
In case of gliclazide, the amount of drug released from topical bases<br />
incorporating solid dispersions can be arranged in the following<br />
descending order. Topical preparations containing (8:92) PEG 6000 ><br />
(1:10) glucose > (8:92) PEG 4000 > (1:10) urea solid dispersions > pure<br />
drug.<br />
The blood glucose reducing activity of ointment contained (10:90)<br />
gliclazide –PEG 6000 solid dispersions was significantly more when<br />
compared to ointment contained gliclazide alone.<br />
In case of glibenclamide, the presence of various penetration<br />
enhancers increase the amount of drug released from the topical base in<br />
vitro. The maximum release was obtained by using IPM (1%).<br />
Ointments contained 1% cetrimide and 1% oleic acid enhanced the<br />
blood glucose reducing activity of glibenclamide . While addition of 1%<br />
isopropyl myristate and 5% Labrafil did not show any enhancement in the<br />
blood glucose reducing activity of glibenclamide.<br />
In conclusion, it was demonstrated that sulfonylureas were absorbed<br />
through the skin and lowered the blood glucose levels. The results<br />
suggest the possibility of transdermal administration of sulfonylureas for<br />
the treatment of NIDDM.<br />
149
A<br />
Aboofazeli, R., Zia, H. and Needham, T.E., Drug Deliv., (2002), 9,<br />
239–247.<br />
Abu T.M. Serajuddin, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews (2007).<br />
Agharkar, S., Lindenbaum, S., Higuchi, T., J. Pharm.Sci., (1976), 65,<br />
747-749.<br />
Ainsworth, M., J. Soc. Cosmetic Chemists, (1960), 11. 69.<br />
Al-Angary, A.A., Al-Mahrouk, G.M. and Al-Meshal, M.A., Pharm.<br />
Ind., (1996), 58(3), 260.<br />
Al-Suwayeh, S.A., Saudi Pharmaceutical Journal, (2003), 11(1-2), 46.<br />
Ambike, A.A., Mahadik, K.R., Paradkar, A., Int.J. Pharm., (2004),<br />
282(1), 151-162.<br />
Amin, K., Dannenfelser, R. M., J. Zielinski, Wang, B., J. Pharm. Sci.,<br />
(2004), 93, 2244-2249.<br />
Ammar H.O., Ghorab M., El-Nahas, S., Int. J. Pharm., (2006), 327, 81-<br />
88.<br />
Ammar, H. O., Ghorab, M., El-Nahhasa, S. A., Kamela, R., Asian<br />
J. Pharm. Sci., (2007), 2 (3), 96-105.<br />
Anil, J. S., Kevin, C.G., Namdeo, R. J. and Harinath, M.N., J.<br />
Pharmaceutical Reviews, (2007), 5, Issue 6.<br />
Anshel, J. and Lieberman, H.A., In The Theory and Practice of<br />
Industrial Pharmacy, Ist edn., Lachman, L., Lieberman, H.A. and Kany,<br />
J.L. (eds.), Lee and Febiger, Philadelphia, (1976), 242-249.<br />
Arias, M.J., Gines, J.M., Moyano, J.R. and Rabasco, A.M., Pharm.<br />
Acta Helv.,(1996), 71, 229.<br />
150
Arias, M.J., Gines, J.M., Moyano, J.R., Rabasco, A.M., Int.J.Pharm.,<br />
(1995), 123, 25-31.<br />
Asada, M., Takashashi, H., Okamoto, H., Tanino, H., Danjo, K.,<br />
Int.J.Pharm., (2004), 270(1), 167-174.<br />
Astley, J.P., and Levine, M., J. Pharm. Sci., (1976), 65, 210.<br />
B<br />
Babu, G.V., Prasad, C.D. and Murthy, K.V., Int J. Pharm., (2002), 234<br />
(1-2), 1.<br />
Balata, G.F., M.sc. pharm. Thesis, Faculty of pharmacy, Zagazig Univ. Egypt,<br />
(1999).<br />
Barr, M., J.Pharm. Sci., (1962), 51, 395-400.<br />
Barry, B.W., Eur. J. Pharm. Sci., (2001), 14, 101-14.<br />
Barry, B.W., In: Dermatological formulation in percutaneous absorption<br />
Marcel Dekker, New York (1983), 1-334.<br />
Barry, B.W., Molec. Aspects. Med., (1991), 12, 195-241.<br />
Barry, B.W and Bennett, L., J. Pharm. Pharmacol. (1987), 39: 535-548<br />
Barthélémy, P., Farah, N., Laforet, J.P., Transcutol-Product profile.<br />
Product Information, Gattefossé, (1995),1.<br />
Behl, C.R., Flynn, G.L., Kurihara, T., Harper, N., Smith, W.,<br />
Higuchi, W.I., Ho, N.F., Pierson, C.L. J. Invest. Dermatol., (1980), 75, 346-<br />
52.<br />
Bentley, M.V., Vianna, R.F., Wilson, S., Collett, J.H. J. Pharm.<br />
Pharmacol., (1997), 49, 397-402.<br />
Bharti D. Shewale, Ravindra A. Fursule and Nidhi P. Sapkal,<br />
International Journal of Health Research, (2008), 1(2): 95-99.<br />
Biana, G., Touitou, E. Crit. Rev. Ther. Drug Carrier Syst., (2003), 20, 63-102.<br />
Bikiaris, D., Papageorgiou, G. Z., Stergiou, A., Pavlidou, E.,<br />
Karavas, E., Kanaze F. and Georgarakis, M., Thermochim. Acta.,<br />
(2005), 439, 58–67.<br />
151
Bitzen, P.O., Melander, A. and Schersten, B., Eur. J. Clin. Pharmacol<br />
(1992), 83, 42-77.<br />
Bonina, F. P. and Montenegro, L., Int. J. Pharm., (1992), 82, 171.<br />
Bos, J.D., Meinardi, M.M. Exp. Dermatol., (2000), 9, 165-9.<br />
Bottari, F., Di Colo, G., Nannipieri, E., Saettone, M.F., and Serfaini, M.F., J.<br />
Pharm. Sci., (1977), 66, 926.<br />
Bradshaw, M., Am. Perfumer, (1961), 76, 15.<br />
Breitenbach, J., Eur. J. Biopharm., (2002), 54(2), 107.<br />
Brewster, M.E. and Loftsson, T., Pharmazie, (2002), 57(2), 94.<br />
Bronaugh, R.L.; Stewart, R.F.; Storm, J.E. Extent of cutaneous<br />
metabolism during percutaneous absorption of xenobiotics. Toxicology<br />
and Applied Pharmacology.(1989), 99: 534-543.<br />
Butler, J.A., Br. J. Dermatol., (1966), 78, 665.<br />
C<br />
Castellan, G.W., In: Physical Chemistry, Addison- Wesley, Menlo Park, (1983), 324-<br />
336.<br />
Catham, S.M., S.T.P. Pharm., (1987), 3, 575.<br />
Celebi, N., Kislal, O. and Tarimci, N., Pharmazi, 48, (1993) , 12.<br />
Ceschel, G.C., Maffei, P., and Gentile, M., (1999), Drug Dev. Ind.<br />
Pharm., 125(9), 1035-1039.<br />
Cevc, G., Crit. Rev. Ther. Drug Carrier Syst., (1996), 13, 257-388.<br />
Cevc, G., "Transferosomes: Innovative Transdermal Drug Carriers," in<br />
"Modified Release drug delivery Technology," M.J.Rathbone, J.,<br />
Hadgraft, M.S., Roberts, Eds., Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, NY,<br />
(2003), 533.<br />
Chakole C. M., Shende M. A and Khadatkar S.N., Int. J. Chem. Tech.<br />
Research, (2009), 1,103-116.<br />
Chatterjee, D. J., Li and Koda, R. T., Pharm. Res. (1997), 14, 1058.<br />
152
Chauhan, B. et al., Chauhan B, Shimpi S, Paradkar A., Eur. J. Pharm.<br />
Sci., (2005), 26, 219–230.<br />
Chaumeil, J.C., Micronisation: a method of improving the<br />
bioavailability of poorly solubledrugs, Methods and Findings in<br />
Experimental and Clinical Pharmacology, (1998), 20,211-215.<br />
Chayen, J., Bitensky, L., Butcher, R.G., Poulter, L.W., and Ubhi, G.S., Br. J.<br />
Dermatol., (1970), 82(suppl.6), 62.<br />
Chi, H.L. and Choi, H.K., AAPS Pharm. Sci. Tech., (2000), 1(2), 13.<br />
Chine, Y.W., (ed.), "Transdermal controlled release drug<br />
administration," In "Fundamentals, Development Concepts, Biomedical<br />
assessments," (1982) 1 st edn., Vol. (14), Marcel Dekker, New York, pp.<br />
179-215.<br />
Chine, Y.W., "Transdermal Therapeutic Systems," In "Controlled Drug<br />
Delivery: Fundamentals and Applications," (1987), J.R., Robonson and<br />
V.H.L., Lee, Eds., 2 nd ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, pp. 523.<br />
Chiou,W.L., Riegelman, S., J. Pharm. Sci. (1969), 56, 1505-1510.<br />
Chiou,W.L., Riegelman, S., ibid. (1971), 58, 1281-1302.<br />
Choi, H-G., Rhee, J-D., Yu, B-K. and Yong, C-S., J. Kor., Pharm. Sci.,<br />
(2003), 33(1), 29.<br />
Choi, Y-G., Cui, Y., Kim, K-N., Park, E-S. and Chi,S-C., ibid, (2003),<br />
33(2), 129.<br />
Chutimaworapan, S., Ritthidej, G.C., Yonemochi, E., Oguchi, T. and Yamamoto,<br />
K., Drug Dev. and Ind. Pharm., (2000), 26(11), 1141.<br />
Collet, D.M., "Ointment pastes and gels," In " Pharmaceutical Practice," 1 st edn.,<br />
Chapter (4), Michael, E.A. and Collet, D.M. (ed.), Longman Pte Ltd., Singapore,<br />
(1991) pp. 125-133.<br />
Cormier, M., and Daddona, P.E., "Macroflux Technology for<br />
transdermal Delivery of Therapeutic Protins and Vaccines," in "Modified<br />
Release Drug Delivery Technology," M.J.Rathbone, J., Hadgraft, M.S.,<br />
Roberts, Eds., Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, NY, 2003, 590.<br />
153
Corrigan, O.I., Murphy, C.A., Timony, R.P., Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm.,<br />
(1979), 4(1), 67-74.<br />
Craig, D.Q.M., Int. J. Pharm., (2002), 231, 131–144.<br />
Craig, D.Q.M., Drug Dev. and Ind. Pharm., (1990), 16, 2514.<br />
Cutler, L., Howes C., Deeks N. J., Buck T. L. , Jeffrey P., J. Pharm.<br />
Sci., (2006), 95, 1944–1953.<br />
D<br />
Davaran, S.; Rashidi, M.R.; Hashemi, M., J. Pharm. Pharmacol.,<br />
(2003), 55, 513-7.<br />
Dhavse V.V., Amin P.D., East Pharm. (1997), 133– 135.<br />
Di colo, G., Carelli, V., Giannaccini, B., Serafini, M.F., and Bottari, f., J. Pharm.<br />
Sci., (1980), 69, 387.<br />
Dipolo. R., Sha'afi, R.I., and Solomon, A.K., J. Gen. Physiol., (1970), 55, 63.<br />
Domain, F., Blaton, N., Naesens, L., Balzarini, J., Kinget, R., Augustijns, P. and<br />
Mooter, G.V., Eur. J. Pharm. Sci., ( 2000), 10, 313.<br />
Domb, A.J., Int.J.Pharm.Sci.,(1995), 124, 271.<br />
Doshi, D.H, Ravis, W. R. And Betageri, G.V., Drug Develop. Indust.<br />
Pharm., (1997), 23(12), 1167-1176.<br />
Duncan, J. I., Payne, S. N., Winfield, A. J., Ormerod, A.D. and<br />
Thomson, A. W., Br. J. Dermatol., (1990), 123, 631.<br />
E<br />
Egbaria, K., Ramachandran, C., Kittayanond, D., Weiner, N.<br />
Antimicrob. Agents Chemother., (1990), 34, 107-10.<br />
Ehrenstrom Reiz, G.M. and Reiz, S.L., Acta Anaesthesiol. Scand.,<br />
(1982), 26, 596-8.<br />
Elias, P.M., Cooper, E.R., Korc, A., and Brown, B.E., J. Invest. Dermatol., (1981),<br />
76, 297.<br />
154
El-Megrab, N.A., El-Nahas, H.M. and Balata,G.F. Saudi<br />
Pharmaceutical Journal, (2006), 14, Nos. 3-4, 157.<br />
El-Nahas, H.M. PhD. Thesis, Faculty of pharmacy, Zagazig Univ. Egypt, (2001).<br />
El-Nokaly M., and Cornell, D., "Microemulsion and Emulsions in foods,"<br />
Developed from a symposium sponsored by the Division of Agriculture and food<br />
chemistry at 19 th National meeting of the American Chemical Society, Boston,<br />
(1990).<br />
El-Sayed, Y.M., Suleiman, M.S., Hassan, M.M., Abdel-Hamid, M.E.,<br />
Najib, N.M., Sallam, E.S. and Shubair, M.S., Int. J. Clin Pharmacol<br />
Ther Toxicol, (1989), 27, 551-557.<br />
Emara, L.H., Badr, R.M. and Abd El-bary, A., Drug Dev. and Ind. Pharm., (2002),<br />
28(7), 795.<br />
Etman, A.M., Alex. J. Pharm. Sci., (2000), 14(1), 79.<br />
Ezzedeen, F.W., Shihab, F.A. and Stohs, S.J., Inter. J. Pharm.,<br />
(1986), 28, 113-117.<br />
F<br />
Faber, O.K., Beck-Nielsen, H. and Binder, C. Diabetes Care (1990), 31,<br />
13-26.<br />
Fang, J.Y. Wu, P.C., Huang, Y.B. and Tsai, Y.H., Int J. Pharm.,<br />
(1996), 128, 169-177.<br />
Fang, J.Y., Hawang, T.L. and Leu, Y.L., (2003), Int. J.Pharm.,250,313-325.<br />
Fergany, A.M., Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm., (2001), 27(10), 1083.<br />
Fincher, T. K., Yoo, S. D., Player, M. R., Sowell, J. w. and<br />
Minchaniak, B. B., J. Pharm. Sci., (1996), 85, 920.<br />
Fini,A., Moyano, J.R., Ginés, J.M., Martinez, J.I., Rabasco, A.M.,<br />
Eur. J. Pharm. Biopharm., (2005), 117-122.<br />
Fledmann, R.J., and Maibach, H.I., Arch. Dermatol., (1965), 91, 661.<br />
Fledmann, R.J., and Maibach, H.I., ibid, (1966), 94, 649.<br />
Fledmann, R.J., and Maibach, H.I., J. Invest. Dermatol., (1967), 48, 181.<br />
Fledmann, R.J., and Maibach, H.I., ibid, (1969), 52, 89.<br />
155
Fledmann, R.J., and Maibach, H.I., ibid, (1968), 50, 351.<br />
Fledmann, R.J., and Maibach, H.I., ibid, (1970), 54, 399.<br />
Flynn, G.L. and Roseman, T.J., ibid, (1971), 60, 1788.<br />
Ford, J.L. and Timmins, P., In Pharmaceutical Thermal Analysis, Technique and<br />
Applications, Ellis Horwood Limited, (1989).<br />
Forster, A., Rades, T. and Hempenstall, J., Pharm. Technol. Eur., (2002), 14(10),<br />
27.<br />
Francois, D. and Jones, B.E., European Capsule Technology Symposium, Constance<br />
pp. 55-61 (11-13 October 1978).<br />
Fricke, S., Dittgen, M., Gerecke, H., Osterwald, H., Pharmazie, (1995),<br />
50, 507- 508.<br />
Furia, T.E. (Ed) Hand book of food Additives, 2 nd edn., (1972), 129-137.<br />
G<br />
Gary-Bobo, C.M., Dipolo, R., and Solomon, A.K., J. Gen Physiol., (1969), 54, 369.<br />
Ghaderi, R., Artursson, P., Carlfors J., Pharm. Res., (1999), 16, 676–<br />
681.<br />
Ghazy, F.S., Ghareeb, S.A., Mahdy,M.A., El-Ghamry, H.A., Issa,<br />
M.M. and Sabaty, A.M., (2004), Alex. J. Pharm. Sci., 18(2), 151-158.<br />
Ghebremeskel, A.N. , Vemavarapu, C., Lodaya, M., Int. J. Pharm.,<br />
(2007), 328, 119–129.<br />
Ginés, J.M., Arias, M.J., Moyano, J.R. and Sanches-Soto, P.J., Int. J.<br />
Pharm., (1996), 143, 247.<br />
Gloor, M., Fluhr, J., Wasik, B. and Gehring, W., Pharmazie ,<br />
(2001), 56,. 810–814.<br />
Goldberg, A. H., Gibaldi, M. and Kanig, J.L., J.Pharm. Sci.(1966),55,<br />
482-487.<br />
Goldberg, A. H., Gibaldi, M. and Kanig, J.L., J.Pharm. Sci.(1965),54,<br />
1145-1148.<br />
156
Goodman, M. and Barry, B.W., J. Invest. Dermatol., (1988), 91, 323-<br />
327.<br />
Greenhalgh, D.J., Williams, A.c., Timmins, P. and York, P., J. Pharm.<br />
Sci., (1999), 88(11), 1182.<br />
Gul Majid Khan and Zhu Jiabi, Drug Develop. Indust. Pharm., (1998),<br />
24(5), 455-462.<br />
Gupta, P., and Garg, S., Pharmaceutical technology, 104, (2002), 144.<br />
Gwak H.S., Chun I.K., Arch Pharm Res. (2001), 24(6), 572-7.<br />
H<br />
Habib, F.S. and El- Shanawany, S.M., Bull. Pharm. Sci., Assuit<br />
University, Egypt, (1989), 12(1), 90-102.<br />
Hadgraft, J. Modulation of the barrier function of skin. Skin<br />
Pharmacology and Applied Skin Physiology. (2001), 14(suppl 1): 72-81.<br />
Heather A.E. Benson. Current Drug Delivery, (2005), 2, 23-33.<br />
Higuchi, T. and Cannors, K.A., Adv. Anal. Chem. Instrum., (1965), 4,<br />
117.<br />
Hirvonen, J., Rajala, R., Vihervaara, p., Laine, E., Paronen, P.<br />
and Urtti, A., Eur. J. Pharm. Biopharm., (1994), 40, 81.<br />
Hong, S. S., Lee, S. H., Lee, Y. J., Chung, S. J., Lee, M. H. and Shim,<br />
C. K., J. Control. Rel., (1998), 51( 2-3), 185-192.<br />
Hosny, E.A., Abdel Hady, S.S., and Niazy, E.M., (1998), Acta Pharm.<br />
Helv., 72, 247-254.<br />
Howes, D., Guy, R., Hadgraft, J., Heylings, J., Hoeck, u.,Kamper, F.,<br />
Hu, C.J. and Rhodes, D.G., Int. J. Pharm., (1999), 185, 23-35.<br />
I<br />
157
Idson, B., Drug. Metab. Rev., (1983), 14, 207-222.<br />
Ismail, S., Mohamed, A.A. and Abd El-Mohesn, M.G., Bull.<br />
Pharm.Sci. Assiut. University, (1990), 13, Part 1, 115-123.<br />
J<br />
Jachowicz, R., Nurnberg, E. and Hoppe, R., Int. J. Pharm.(1993), 99,<br />
321-325.<br />
Jachowicz, R. and Nurnberg, E., ibid, (1997), 149-158.<br />
Jia –You, F., Pao-Chu,W., Yaw-Bin,H. and Yi-Hung, T., Int. J.<br />
Pharm., (1996),128, 169.<br />
Johari, G.P., Kim, S., Shanker, R.M., J. Pharm. Sci., (2005), 94, 2207–<br />
2223.<br />
Joseph T. Rubino,Cosolvents and Cosolvency, (2002), 1, 658-670.<br />
Juppo, A.M., Boissier, C., Khoo, C., Int. J. Pharm., (2003), 250(2), 385-<br />
401.<br />
K<br />
Kang, B.K., Lee, J.S., Chon, S.K., Jeong, S.Y., Yuk, S.H., Khang, G.,<br />
Lee, H.B. and Cho , Int. J. Pharm., (2004), 274, 65–73.<br />
Karavas, E., Georgios K., Aristotelis X. and Emmanouel G. , Eur. J.<br />
Pharm. Biopharm., (2006), 63, 103–114.<br />
Kaufmann, G., Dittgen, M., GraÈser, T., Gerecke, H., Osterwald, H.,<br />
Oettel, M., Pharmazie, (1995), 50, 50-51.<br />
Kerc, J., Srcic, S.,Kofler, B., Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm., (1998), 24(4), 359-<br />
363.<br />
Khitworth, C.K. and Stephenson, R.E., J. Pharm. Sci.,(1971), 60-48.<br />
Kligman, A.M., J. Am. Med. Assoc., (1965),193, 796.<br />
158
Kreuter, J., Feste Dispersionen, in: Kreuter, J., Herzfeldt (Eds.),<br />
Grundlagen der Arzneifoemenlehre Galenik, 2, Springer, Frankfurt am<br />
Main, 1999, pp. 262-274.<br />
Kshirsagr., N.A., Indian.J. Pharm. Sci. (2000), 32, 554.<br />
L<br />
Larrucea, E., Arellano,A., Santoyo,S. and Ygartua, P.,(2001), Drug<br />
Dev. Ind. Pharm., 27(3), 251-260.<br />
Law, D., Wang, W., Schmitt, E.A., Qiu, Y., Krill, S.L. and Fort, J., J.<br />
Pharm. Sci., (2003), 92(3), 505.<br />
Law, S.L., Lo, W.Y., Lin, F.M. and Chaing, C.H., Int.J. Pharm.,<br />
(1992), 84, 161.<br />
Leuner, C. and Dressman,J., Eur. J. Pharm. Biopharm., (2000), 55, 47–<br />
60.<br />
Lloyd, G.R., Craig, D.Q.M. and Smith, A., Eur. J. Pharm. Biopharm.,<br />
(1999), 48, 59–65.<br />
Loftsson, T., Brewster, M.E. J. Pharm. Sci., (1996), 85, 1017-25.<br />
M<br />
Mackenzie, I.C., J. Invest. Derm. (1975), 65(1): 45-51.<br />
Madhusudhan, B., Rambhan, D., Gudsoorkar, V.R., Shete, J.S.,<br />
Apte, S. S., Indian J.of Pharm.Sci., (1999), 61(6), 346-349.<br />
Majerik, V., Charrbit G., Badens E., Horvath G., Szokonya L.,<br />
Bosc N., Teillaud E., J. Supercrit. Fluids, (2007), 40, 101–110.<br />
Malay, k. D., Asokangshu, B. and Sarojk, G., Acta Poloniae<br />
Pharmaceutical Drug Research, (2006), 63 (6), 535-541.<br />
Malkinson, F.D., In The Epidermis, W., Montagna, Ed., Academic press, New York,<br />
(1964), chapter 20.<br />
Malkinson, F.D., J. Invest. Dermatol., (1958), 31, 19.<br />
Malkinson, F.D., J. Soc. Cosmetic Chemists, (1956), 7, 109.<br />
159
Mallick, B., Sahoo, A. and Mirta, B.B., Boll. Chim. Farm., (2003),<br />
142(4), 180.<br />
Mario, J., Mira, B. L., Ana, K. and Biserka, C. C., Acta Pharm,<br />
(2005), 55, 223-236.<br />
Martin, A. In "Physical Pharmacy," 4 th edn., Chapter (12 and 13), B.I.<br />
Waverly Pvt. Ltd., N.D. (1994), pp. 284-289 and 324-336.<br />
Martindale, "The Extra Pharmacopeia". 31 st edn., by James, E.F<br />
Reynolds. and Kathleen Parfitt, Royal Pharmaceutical Society, London,<br />
(1996), 341-361.<br />
McKenzie, A.W., Stoughton, R.B. Arch. Dermatol., (1962), 86, 608-<br />
610.<br />
Megwa, S.A.; Cross, S.E.; Benson, H.A.E.; Roberts, M.S. J. Pharm.<br />
Pharmacol., (2000), 52, 919-28.<br />
Mei, Z., Chen, H., Weng, T., Yang, Y., Yang, X. Eur. J. Pharm.<br />
Biopharm., (2003), 56, 189-96.<br />
Mendyk, A., Jachowicz, R., Expert Systems with Applications, (2005),<br />
28, 285-294.<br />
Menton, D.N., J. Invest. Derm., (1976), 66(5): 283-291.<br />
Mezei, M. and Gulasekharam, V. Life Sci., (1980), 26, 1473-7.<br />
Michniak, B. B., Chapman, J. M. and Seyda, K. L., J. Pharm. Sci.,<br />
(1993), 82, 214.<br />
Moes, A., J.Pharm. Acta. Helv., (1982), 56,21.<br />
Moghimi, H.R., Williams, A.C., and Barry, B.W., "Stratum corneum<br />
and barrier performance; a model lamellar structure approach," In<br />
"Percutaneous Absorption," R.L., Bronaugh, and H.I., Maibach, Eds.,<br />
Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, NY, (1999),515.<br />
Moghimi, H.R., Williams, A.C., and Barry, B.W., Int. J. of Pharm.<br />
(1996), 145, 49.<br />
160
Moghimi, H.R., Williams, A.C., and Barry, B.W., Int. J. of Pharm.<br />
(1997), 146, 41.<br />
Moneghini, M., Carcano, A., Zingone, G. and Perissutti, B., Int. J.<br />
Pharm., (1998), 175. 177.<br />
Moneghini, M., Kikic, I., Voinovich, D., Perissutti, B. and Filipovic-<br />
Grcic, J., Int. J. Pharm., (2001), 222 (1). 129.<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, N.A. Comparative anatomy, physiology, and<br />
biochemistry of mammalian skin. In: Dermal and Ocular Toxicology:<br />
Fundamentals and Methods. Ed. D Hobson, CRC Press, London. (1991),<br />
pp. 3-17.<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, N.A. Dermatotoxicology. In: Introduction to<br />
Biochemical Toxicology. Eds. E. Hodgson and R.C. Smart, Wiley-<br />
Interscience. (2001a), pp. 509-537.<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, N.A. Integument. In: Biology of the Domestic Pig.<br />
Ed. W.G. Pond and H.J. Mersmann, Comstock Publishing. (2001b), pp.<br />
625-652.<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, N.A. Anatomical factors affecting barrier function. In:<br />
Dermatotoxicology. Eds. H. Zhai and H.I. Maibach, CRC Press. (2004),<br />
pp. 43-70<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, N.A. Structure and function of skin. In: Dermal<br />
Absorption Models in Toxicology and Pharmacology. Ed. J.E. Riviere,<br />
Taylor and Francis. (2006), pp. 1-19.<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, N.A.; Inman, A.O.; Mak, V.; Wertz, P.; Riviere,<br />
J.E. Effect of selective lipid extraction from different body regions on<br />
epidermal barrier function. Pharmaceutical Research. (2001), 18: 992-<br />
998.<br />
Monteiro-Riviere, N.A.; Stinson, A.W. Calhoun, HL Integument. In:<br />
Textbook of Veterinary Histology. Ed. H.D. Dellmann, Lea and Febiger.<br />
(1993), pp. 285-312.<br />
161
Morgan , T.M., Parr, R.A., Reed, B.L., and Finnin., B.C.,<br />
J.Pharm.Sci., (1998), 87, 1219.<br />
Muhrer G., Meier U., Fusaro F., Albano S., Mazzotti M., Int. J.<br />
Pharm., (2006), 308, 69–83.<br />
Mukne, A.P., Nagarsenker, M.S., AAPS Pharm. Sci. Tech., (2004),<br />
5(1), 1-9.<br />
Mummaneni, V., Vassavada, R.C., Int. J. Pharm., (1990), 66(1), 71-77.<br />
Mura, P., Faucci, M.T., Manderioli, A., Bramanti, G. and Parrini,<br />
P., Drug Develop. Indust. Pharma., (1999), 25(3), 257-264.<br />
Mura, P., Faucci, M.T., Bramanti, G. and Corti, P., Eur. J. Pharm.<br />
Sci., (2000), 9, 365-372.<br />
Mutalik S. and Udupa N., Pharmazie, (2003), 58(12), 891-894.<br />
Mutalik S. and Udupa N., J. Pharm. Sci., (2005), 8(1): 26-38.<br />
Mutalik S. and Udupa N. J. Pharm. Sci., (2004) 93(6), 1592.<br />
N<br />
Nakano, M. and Patel, N., J. Pharm. Sci., (1970), 59, 985-988.<br />
Nakano, M., Kuchiki, A., and Arita,T., Chem. Pharm. Bull., (1976) (Tokyo),23<br />
1404.<br />
Namdeo, A., and Jain., N.K., Indian.J. Pharm. Sci. (1996), 58(2), 41.<br />
Nokhodchi, A., Shokri, J., Dashbolaghi, A., Hassan-Zadeh, D.,<br />
Ghafourian, T. and Barzegar-Jalal, M., J. Int. Pharm., (2003), 250(2),<br />
359-369.<br />
Nour, S.A., Bull. Fac. Pharm. Cairo Univ., (1993), 31, Nr.2, 219.<br />
O<br />
Okonogi, S., Oguchi, T., Yonemochi, E., Puttipipatkhachorn,S. and<br />
Yamamoto, K., Int. J. of Pharm., (1997), 156, 175-180.<br />
162
P<br />
Palmieri, G.F., Welhrle, P. and Martelli, S., Drug Dev. and Ind.<br />
Pharm., (2002), 24(7), 653.<br />
Pan, R.N., Chen., J.H., Chen, R.R., Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm., (2000), 9,<br />
989-994.<br />
Pamela, G.T., Glibenclamide In: Analytical Profiles of Drug Substances,<br />
Vol (10), Klaus Florey, (1981), Academic Press, INC. (London) LTD,<br />
pp.338-355.<br />
Park, E.S., Chang, S.J., Rhee, Y.S. and Chi, S.C., Drug Dev. and Ind.<br />
Pharm., (2001), 27, 975–980.<br />
Patil, S., Singh, P., Szolar-Platzer, C., and Maibach. H., J. Pharm.<br />
Sci., (1996), 85, 249.<br />
Pinnamaneni, S., Das, N.G., Das, S.K., Pharmazie, (2002), 57, 291 – 300.<br />
Pokharkar, V.B., Mandpe, L.P., Mahesh N. Padamwar, M.N.,<br />
Anshuman A. Ambike, A.A., Kakasaheb R. Mahadik, K.R. and<br />
Paradkar, A., Powder Technol., (2006), 167, 20–25.<br />
Porzio, S., Csselli, G., Pelleggrini, L., Del Rosario, M., Coppola, A.,<br />
Boltri, L., Gentile, M., Clavenna G. and Melillo, G.,<br />
Pharmacol.Res., (1998), 37, 41.<br />
Potts, R.O.; Guy, R.H. Pharm. Res., (1992), 9, 663-9.<br />
Pouton, C.W., Eur. J. Pharm. Sci., (2006), 29, 278–287.<br />
Prausnitz, M.R, Ackley, D.E., and Gyory., J.R., "Macrophabricated<br />
Microneedles for Transdermal Drug Delivery Technology,"<br />
M.J.Rathbone, J., Hadgraft, M.S., Roberts, Eds., Marcel Dekker Inc.,<br />
New York, NY, 2003, 514.<br />
163
Price, J.C., Polyethylene glycol. In: A. Wade and Weller, P.J., Editors,<br />
Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, American Pharmaceutical<br />
Association/The Pharmaceutical Press, Washington, DC/London (1994),<br />
pp. 355-361.<br />
R<br />
Ramadan, A.A., Journal of Applied Sciences Research, (2008), 4(9),<br />
1052-1065.<br />
Rasenack, N. and Muller, B.W., , Pharm. Dev. Technol., (2004), 9, 1–<br />
13.<br />
Report, Polymeric Transport System, Cosmetics and Tolietries, (1992),<br />
107, 14.<br />
Riviere, J.E. Biological factors in absorption and permeation. Cosmetics<br />
and Toiletries.(1990), 105: 85-93.<br />
Ruland, A., Kreuter, J. and Rytting, J. H., Int. J. Pharm., (1994), 101,<br />
57.<br />
S<br />
Sammour, O.A., Elkheshen, S,A., El-Shaboury, M.H., Al-Quadeib,<br />
B.T., Bull Fac Pharm Cairo Univ., (2001), 39, No. 1.<br />
Santos Maia, C., Mehnert, W., Schaller, M., Korting, H.C., Gysler,<br />
A.; Haberland, A., Schafer-Korting, M. J. Drug Target, (2002), 10,<br />
489-95.<br />
Santoyo, S., and Ygartua, P., Eur. J. Pharm. Biopharm., (2000), 50,<br />
245–250.<br />
Sarisuta, N., Saowakontha, R. and Ruangusksriwong, C., Drug Dev.<br />
Ind. Pharm., (1999), 25(3), 373.<br />
Sarpotdar, P.P. and Zatz, J.L., Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm., (1986a), 12,<br />
1625–1647.<br />
164
Sarpotdar, P.P. and Zatz, J.L., J. Pharm. Sci., (1986b), 75, 176.<br />
Sarveiya, V.; Templeton, J.F.; Benson, H.A.E. J. Pharm. Pharmacol.,<br />
(2004), 56, 717-724.<br />
Schachter, D.M., Xiong, J., Tirol, G.C., Int. J. Pharm., (2004), 28(1),<br />
89-101.<br />
Scheuplein, R.J. and Ross, L.W., J. Invest. Dermatol., (1974),62, 353-<br />
360.<br />
Schwartz, C., Mehenert., W., Lucks, J.S., and Muller, R.H.,<br />
Int.J.Pharm.Sci., (1992), 88, 53.<br />
Scott, R.C., "In-vitro absorption through damaged skin," In<br />
"Fundamentals and Applications," (1991), Bronaugh, R.L. and Maibach,<br />
H.I. (ed.), CRC Press., PP. 129-135.<br />
Sekiguchi, K. and Obi, N., Chem. Pharm. Bull (Tokyo), (1964), 12,<br />
134–144.<br />
Sekiguchi, K., Obi, N., Chem. Pharm. Bull., (1961), 9, 866-872.<br />
Sentjurc,M., Vrhovnik, K., Kristl, J. J. Control Rel., (1999), 59, 87- 97.<br />
Serajuddin, A.T., J. Pharm. Sci., (1999), 88, 1058–1066.<br />
Sethia, S. and Squillante, E., Int. J. Pharm., (2004), 272(1-2), 1181.<br />
Shahiwala, A. , Misra, A. J. Pharm. Pharmaceut. Sci., (2002), 5, 220-5.<br />
Siavoush Dastmalchi, Alireza Garjani, Nasrin Maleki, Golaleh<br />
Sheilkhee, Vida Baghchevan, Parisa Jafari-Azad, Hadi Valizaeh,<br />
Mohammad Barzegar-Jalali, J. Pharm. Pharmaceu. Sci., (2005), 8(2),<br />
175-181.<br />
Silverstein, R.M., Bassler, G.C., Morril, T.C., Wiley, New York,<br />
(1991), pp. 91-131.<br />
Singh, J., Tripathi, K. P. and Sakya, T. R., Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm.,<br />
(1993), 19,1623.<br />
Singh, U.V. and Udupa, N., Indian. J. Pharm. Sci., (1997), 59(6), 333.<br />
165
Singhal, D. and Curatolo, W., Adv. Drug. Deliv. Rev.,(2004), 56, 335-<br />
347.<br />
Sinha, V.R. and Maninder Pal Kaur, Drug Develop. Ind. Pharm.,<br />
(2000), 26(11), 1131-1140.<br />
Sloan, K.B., Prodrugs. Topical and Ocular Drug Delivery. Drugs and the<br />
Pharmaceutical Sciences. Vol. 53. New York: Marcel Dekker Inc. (1992),<br />
pp. 313.<br />
Sloan, K.B.; Wasdo, S. Med. Res. Rev., (2003), 23, 763-93.<br />
Smack, D.P.; Korge, M.D.; James, W.D. Journal of the American<br />
Academy for Dermatology. (1994), 30: 85-102.<br />
Sabati, A.M, M.sc. pharm. Thesis, Faculty of pharmacy, Zagazig Univ.<br />
Egypt, (1998).<br />
Sridevi, S; Chary, M.G.; D.R. Krishna, D.R.; Prakash V. Diwan<br />
Indian Journal of Pharmacology (2000); 32: 309-312<br />
Srini Tenjarla, Porranee Puranajoti, Ram Kasina and Tarun<br />
Mandal, J.Pharm. Sci., (1998), 87(4), 425-429.<br />
Srinivas, M. and Nayanabhirama, U., J.Pharm. Pharmaceut. Sci.,<br />
(2005), 8(1), 26-38.<br />
Stinchcomb, A.L., Swaan, P.W., Ekabo, O., Harris, K.K., Browe, J.,<br />
Hammell, D.C., Cooperman, T.A. and Pearsall, M. J. Pharm. Sci.,<br />
(2002), 91, 2571-8.<br />
Stetinova, V., Kvetina, J., Patera, J., Polakova, A. and Prazakova,<br />
M., Biopharmaceutics and Drug Deposition, (2007),28(5), 241-248.<br />
Stroev, E.A., Belkina, Z.V., Farmakol Toksikol (1989), 7,52-74.<br />
Suwanpidokkul, N., Thongnopnua, P., and Umprayn, K., AAPS<br />
Pharm Sci Tech., (2004), 5(3)48, 1.<br />
Swarbrick J., Boylan J.C., "Encyclopedia Of Pharmaceutical<br />
Technology"; 2 nd edn, (2002), 3, 2458-2479.<br />
166
T<br />
Tadeusz, W. Hermann, Roman Dobrucki, Stefan Piechocki, Matylda<br />
Resztak and Robert Reh, Med Sci Monit, (2005); 11(6),181-188.<br />
Takahashi Y, Furuya K, Iwata M, Onishi H, Machida Y, Shirotake S.<br />
Yakugaku Zasshi. (1997), 117(12):1022-7.<br />
Takahashi, H., Chen, R., Okamoto, H., Danjo, K., Chem. Pharm. Bull<br />
(Tokyo), (2005), 53, 37-41.<br />
Takeuchi, H., Nagira, S., Yamamoto, H., Kawashima, Y., Powder<br />
Technology, (2004), 141(3), 187-195.<br />
Tantishaiyakul, V., Kaewnopparat, N. and Ingkatawornwong, S., Int.<br />
J. Pharm.,(1996), 143, 59.<br />
Taylor, C.; Scogna, K.H.; Ajello, J.P. (Eds). Histology: A Text and<br />
Atlas. Baltimore: Lippencott Williams & Wilkins. (2006), pp. 98-138;<br />
442-463.<br />
Taylor, L.S. and Zografi, G., Pharm. Res., (1997), 14, 1691–1698.<br />
Tehrany, M.R. and Mehramizi, A., (2000). Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm.,<br />
26(4), 409-414.<br />
Trapani, G., Franco, M., Latrofa, A., Pantaleo, M.R. and<br />
Provenzano, M.R., Int. J. Pharm., (1999), 184, 121.<br />
Thorsteinsson, T.; Masson, M.; Loftsson, T.; Haraldsson,<br />
G.G.;mStefansson, E. Pharmazie, (1999), 54, 831-6.<br />
Torrado, S., Torrado, J., Cadorniga, R., Int. J. Pharm., (1996), 140,<br />
247-250.<br />
Touitou, E., Dayan, N., Bergelson, L.; Godin, B., Eliaz, M. J. Control<br />
Rel., (2000), 65, 403-18.<br />
Tsai, J.C., Guy, R. H., Thornfeldt, C. R., Gao, W. N., Elias, P. M.<br />
and Feingold, K. R. J. Pharm. Sci., (1996), 85, 643.<br />
167
Tupker, R.A., Pinnagoda, j. and Nater, J.P., Acta Derm. Venereol.<br />
(Stockh.), (1990), 70, 1–5<br />
U<br />
USP-25, NF-20. United State Pharmacopeia-XXV, National Formulary-<br />
XX. United State Pharmacopeial Convention INC., Twinbrook, Parkway,<br />
Rockville, MD, USA, (2002), pp.598.<br />
V<br />
Valenta, C., Siman, U., Kratzel, M. and Hadgraft, J., Int. J. Pharm.,<br />
(2000), 197, 77-85.<br />
Van den Mooter, G., Weuts, I., De Ridder, T. and Blaton, N., Int. J.<br />
Pharm., (2006), 316, 1–6.<br />
Van den Mooter, G.,Augustijns, P., Blaton, N. and Kinget, R., ibid.,<br />
1998, 164, 67-80<br />
Vasanthavada, M., Tong, W.Q., Joshi, Y. and Kislalioglu,<br />
M.S., ,Pharm. Res., (2004), 21, 1598–1606.<br />
Vasconcelos, T. and Costa, P., Development of a rapid dissolving<br />
ibuprofen solid dispersion. In PSWC – Pharmaceutical Sciences Wolrd<br />
Conference., (2007).<br />
Villiers, M.M., Wurster, D.E., Watt, J.G., Ketkar, A., Int. J. Pharm.,<br />
(1998), 163(1), 219-224.<br />
Vippagunta, S.R., Zeren, W., Stefanie, H., Steven, L. K., J. Pharm.<br />
Sci., (2006), 96, 294–304.<br />
Visser, M.R., Drooge, D.J., Hinrichs, W.L.J., Wegman, K.A.M.,<br />
Eissens, A.C., Frijlink, H.W., Eur. J. Pharm., (2004), 21(4), 511-518.<br />
W<br />
Wahlberg, J.E., Acta Derm. Venereol. (Stockh), (1965), 45, 397.<br />
168
Walking, W.D., Povidone . In: A. Wade and P.J. Weller, Editors, Handbook of<br />
Pharmaceutical Excepients. American Pharmaceutical Assosiation/ The<br />
Pharmaceutical Press, Washington, DC/London (1994), 392-399.<br />
Wang, X., Michoel, A. and Van den Mooter, G., Int. J. Pharm., (2005),<br />
303, 54–61.<br />
Watannabe, T., Hasegawa, SA., Wakiyama N., Kusai A., Senna M.,<br />
Int. J. Pharm., (2003), 250(1), 283-286.<br />
Wertz, P.W. Percutaneous absorption: role of lipids. In:<br />
Dermatotoxicology. Eds. H. Zhai and H.I. Maibach, CRC Press. pp.<br />
(2004) 71-81.<br />
Westesen, K., Siekmann, B., and Koch, M.J.H., Int.J.Pharm.Sci.,<br />
(1998), 93, 199.<br />
Wester, R. C. and Maibach, H. I. (1999). Regional variation in<br />
perctaneous absorption. In: Bronaugh, R.L. and Maibach, H.I. eds.<br />
Percutaneous Absorption; Drugs – Cosmetics – Mechanisms –<br />
Methodology, 3 rd edn. New York: Marcel Dekker, 107 -116.<br />
Wickrema Sinha, A.J. Shaw, S.R., and Weber, D.J., J. Invest. Dermatol., (1978),<br />
71, 372.<br />
William, A.C. and Barry, B.W., Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, (2004), 56(5),<br />
603-618.<br />
Winfield, A.J., "External preparations," In" Pharmaceutical Practice," 2 nd edn., Part<br />
(2), Chapter (14)., Winfield, A.J and Richards, R.M.E. American Pharmaceutical<br />
Association, Washington, D.C., (1998), PP. 136 – 146.<br />
Williams, A.C and Barry.B.W, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, (2004), 56 (5),<br />
603-618.<br />
Wrenn, J.R. and Simeon, M., United State (1998), Patent No. , 6, 174,<br />
873.<br />
Wurster, D.E., and Kramer, S.F., J. Pharm. Sci. (1961), 50, 288.<br />
Wulff, M., Alden, M. and Craig, D.Q.M., Int. J. Pharm., (1996), 142, 189-198.<br />
Y<br />
169
Yakou, S., Umehara, K., Sonobe, T., Nagia, T., Sugihara, M. and<br />
Fukuyama, Y., Chem.Pharm. Bull.,(Tokyo) (1984), 32(10), 4130.<br />
Yalkowsky, S.H., Roseman, T.J. 1981. "Solubilization of drugs by<br />
cosolvents," In: Yalkowsky, S.H. (Ed.), Techniques of Soluhilization of<br />
Drugs. Dekker, New York.<br />
Yang, S., Zhu, J., Lu, Y., Liang, B., and Yang, C., Pharm. Res., (1999),<br />
16, 751.<br />
Yokomizo, Y., J. Controlled Release, (1996), 42, 217.<br />
Yoshihashi, Y., Iijima H., Yonemochi E., Terada K. , J. Therm. Anal.<br />
Calorim., (2006), 85, 689–692.<br />
Youssef, M. K., El-sayed, E. D., and Fouda, M. A., Drug Dev. and Ind.<br />
Pharm., (1988), 14(15-17), 2667-2685.<br />
170
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
171<br />
<br />
-<br />
-
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
-<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
172<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
-
-<br />
<br />
173<br />
-<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-
-<br />
<br />
<br />
174<br />
<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
-<br />
<br />
-<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-
175<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
-